GV-IPCam H.264
GV-IPCam H.264
User's Manual
Before attempting to connect or operate this product,
please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
ICH264TIV111-A
© 2012 GeoVision, Inc. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in
part, without the written consent of GeoVision.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is
accurate. GeoVision, Inc. makes no expressed or implied warranty of any
kind and assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. No liability is
assumed for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of
the information or products contained herein. Features and specifications
are subject to change without notice. Note: no SD/SDHC card slot or local
storage function for Argentina.
GeoVision, Inc.
9F, No. 246, Sec. 1, Neihu Rd.,
Neihu District, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: +886-2-8797-8377
Fax: +886-2-8797-8335
http://www.geovision.com.tw
Trademarks used in this manual: GeoVision, the GeoVision logo and GV
series products are trademarks of GeoVision, Inc. Windows and Windows
XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
May 2012
Safety Notice
FCC Compliance for GV-CBW120/220
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
UL Certification for GV-MFD120/130/220/320/520
The GV-IPCAM H.264 uses a 3.0V CR2032 Lithium battery as the power
supply for its internal real-time clock (RTC). The battery should not be
replaced unless required!
If the battery does need replacing, please observe the following:
•
Danger of Explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced
•
Replace only with the same or equivalent battery, as recommended
by the manufacturer
•
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's
instructions
I
Preface
Welcome to the GV-IPCAM H.264 User’s Manual.
The GV-IPCAM H.264 has a series of models designed to meet different
needs. This Manual is designed for the following models and firmware
versions:
Note:
1.
GV-IPCam H.264 with 128 MB flash memory is only supported in
V1.09 or later. To look up your camera’s flash memory, see
Appendix I Supported Firmware for Flash Memory.
2.
To upgrade your camera to firmware V1.09 or later, it is required to
use GV IP Device Utility V8.5.3.0.
Model
Firmware
Version
Model Number
GV-BX110D
Fixed Lens
Varifocal Lens
GV-BX120D
Varifocal Lens
GV-BX130D-0
Varifocal Lens
GV-BX130D-1
Fixed Lens
V1.08
GV-BX140DW
Box Camera
GV-BX220D-0
GV-BX220D-1
GV-BX220D-2
GV-BX220D-3
GV-BX320D-0
GV-BX321D-1
GV-BX520D-0
II
V1.11
Varifocal Lens
Model
Firmware
Version
Model Number
GV-BX120D-E
IR Arctic Box
GV-BX220D-E
Camera
GV-BX320D-E
Varifocal Lens
V1.11
GV-BX520D-E
GV-MFD110
V1.08
GV-MFD120
Mini Fixed
Dome
GV-MFD130
Fixed Lens
V1.11
Fixed Lens
V1.11
Varifocal Lens
V1.08
Varifocal Lens
V1.11
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
Mini Fixed
GV-MDR120
Rugged
GV-MDR220
Dome
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
GV-BL110D
GV-BL120D
Bullet Camera
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
PTZ Camera
GV-PTZ010D
NTSC
V1.08
PAL
PT Camera
GV-PT110D
V1.08
III
Model
Firmware
Version
Model Number
GV-VD120D
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD121D
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD122D
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD123D
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD220D
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD221D
Vandal Proof
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
Varifocal
IP Dome
GV-VD222D
Lens
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD223D
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD320D
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD321D
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD322D
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD323D
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
IV
V1.11
Model
GV-FD120D
Fixed IP
Dome
Cube Camera
Wireless
Cube Camera
Firmware
Version
Model Number
GV-FD220D
GV-FD320D
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
Varifocal
Lens
V1.11
Fixed Lens
V1.11
Fixed Lens
V1.11
V
Contents
Naming and Definition...................................................XVI
Options ..........................................................................XVII
Note for Connecting to GV-System............................XVIII
Note for Adjusting Focus and Zoom............................XIX
Note for Installing Camera Outdoor..............................XX
Chapter 1 Introduction .....................................................1
1.1 System Requirement ..................................................................7
Chapter 2 Box Camera .....................................................8
2.1 Packing List...............................................................................10
2.2 Features.....................................................................................11
2.2.1 GV-BX140DW with WDR Function ...................................... 12
2.3 Overview....................................................................................13
2.3.1 GV-BX110D ........................................................................ 13
2.3.2 GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series / 320D
Series / 520D-0............................................................................. 16
2.4 Connecting the Camera............................................................18
2.4.1 GV-BX110D ........................................................................ 18
2.4.2 GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series / 320D
Series / 520D-0............................................................................. 20
2.5 Accessory Installation ..............................................................22
2.5.1 C-Mount Lenses.................................................................. 22
2.5.2 Infrared Illuminators (Optional) ............................................ 24
2.6 I/O Terminal Block ....................................................................25
2.6.1 Pin Assignment ................................................................... 25
2.6.2 Connecting to GV-Relay V2 (Optional) ................................ 27
VI
Chapter 3 IR Arctic Box Camera ...................................29
3.1 Packing List...............................................................................30
3.2 Features.....................................................................................31
3.3 Overview....................................................................................32
3.4 Installation.................................................................................33
3.5 Connecting the Camera............................................................37
3.5.1 Wire Definition..................................................................... 37
3.6 Notice for Using the IR Arctic Box Camera .............................39
3.6.1 Enabling IR LED after Loading Default ................................ 39
3.6.2 Disabling Status LED under Low Light Conditions ............... 40
Chapter 4 Mini Fixed Dome & Mini Fixed Rugged
Dome………...………………………………………………...41
4.1 Packing List...............................................................................42
4.2 Features.....................................................................................43
4.3 Overview....................................................................................45
4.3.1 GV-MFD110......................................................................... 45
4.3.2 GV-MFD120 / 130 / 220 / 320 / 520...................................... 46
4.3.3 GV-MDR120 / 220 / 320 / 520 .............................................. 47
4.4 Installation.................................................................................49
4.4.1 GV-MFD Series.................................................................... 49
4.4.2 GV-MDR Series ................................................................... 51
4.5 Connecting the Camera.............................................................54
4.5.1 Wire Definition...................................................................... 54
4.5.2 Power and Network Connection ........................................... 55
4.5.3 Vehicle Installation ............................................................... 56
Chapter 5 Bullet Camera ................................................57
5.1 Packing List...............................................................................58
5.2 Features.....................................................................................59
5.3 Overview.....................................................................................60
VII
5.4 Installation.................................................................................61
5.4.1 Connecting the Camera ...................................................... 62
5.4.2 Adjusting the Angles ........................................................... 66
5.4.3 Adjusting Lens and Inserting a Micro SD Card..................... 70
5.4.4 Installing the Sun-Shield Cover ........................................... 72
Chapter 6 PTZ Camera ...................................................73
6.1 Packing List...............................................................................74
6.2 Features.....................................................................................75
6.3 Overview....................................................................................76
6.4 Installation.................................................................................78
6.4.1 Ceiling Mount ...................................................................... 78
6.4.2 L-Shaped Wall Mount.......................................................... 80
6.5 Connecting the Camera............................................................83
6.6 Focus Adjustment.....................................................................84
6.7 I/O Terminal Block ....................................................................85
6.7.1 Pin Assignment ................................................................... 85
6.7.2 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional) ..................................... 86
6.8 PTZ Control ...............................................................................87
6.8.1 The PTZ Control Panel......................................................... 87
6.8.2 Automatic Focus .................................................................. 89
6.8.3 PTZ Camera Settings........................................................... 89
6.8.4 Image Settings ..................................................................... 91
6.8.5 Preset Settings..................................................................... 94
6.8.6 Sequence Settings ............................................................... 97
6.8.7 Auto Pan Settings ................................................................ 99
6.8.8 System Configuration ........................................................ 102
Chapter 7 PT Camera....................................................103
7.1 Packing List.............................................................................103
7.2 Features...................................................................................105
VIII
7.3 Overview..................................................................................106
7.4 Installation...............................................................................108
7.5 Connecting the Camera..........................................................108
7.6 Focus Adjustment...................................................................108
7.7 I/O Terminal Block ..................................................................109
7.7.1 Pin Assignment ................................................................. 109
7.7.2 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional) ................................... 109
7.8 PT Control ...............................................................................110
Chapter 8 Vandal Proof IP Dome.................................112
8.1 Packing List.............................................................................113
8.2 Features...................................................................................114
8.3 Overview..................................................................................115
8.4 Installation...............................................................................116
8.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount ........................................................... 116
8.4.2 In-Ceiling Mount................................................................ 121
8.5 Connecting the Camera..........................................................124
8.5.1 Wire Definition................................................................... 124
8.5.2 Power Connection............................................................. 125
8.5.3 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional) ................................... 126
Chapter 9 Fixed IP Dome .............................................127
9.1 Packing List.............................................................................128
9.1.1 Packing List for Hard-Ceiling Mount................................... 128
9.1.2 Packing List for In-Ceiling Mount ....................................... 129
9.2 Features...................................................................................130
9.3 Overview..................................................................................131
9.4 Installation...............................................................................133
9.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount ........................................................... 133
9.4.2 In-Ceiling Mount................................................................ 137
9.4.3 Wall-Surface Mount........................................................... 141
IX
9.5 Connecting the Camera..........................................................143
9.6 I/O Terminal Block ..................................................................144
9.6.1 Pin Assignment ................................................................. 144
9.6.2 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional) ................................... 145
CHAPTER 10 Cube & Wireless Camera......................146
10.1 Packing List...........................................................................147
10.2 Features.................................................................................148
10.3 Overview................................................................................149
10.4 Installation.............................................................................150
10.5 Connecting the Camera ........................................................152
Chapter 11 Getting Started ..........................................153
11.1 Accessing the Live View.......................................................153
11.1.1 Checking the Dynamic IP Address................................... 155
11.1.2 Configuring the IP Address.............................................. 157
11.1.3 Configuring the Wireless Connection............................... 159
11.2 Adjusting Image Clarity ........................................................162
11.2.1 Using Focus Adjustment Cap .......................................... 165
11.2.2 Locations of Adjustment Screws ...................................... 167
11.3 Configuring the Basics .........................................................169
Chapter 12 Accessing the Camera..............................170
12.1 Accessing Your Surveillance Images ..................................170
12.2 Functions Featured on the Main Page .................................172
12.2.1 The Live View Window .................................................... 173
12.2.2 The Control Panel of the Live View Window .................... 176
12.2.3 Snapshot of Live Video.................................................... 181
12.2.4 Video Recording.............................................................. 181
12.2.5 Wide Angle Dewarpping .................................................. 182
X
12.2.6 Picture-in-Picture and Picture-and-Picture View............... 183
12.2.7 Alarm Notification ............................................................ 186
12.2.8 Video and Audio Configuration ........................................ 188
12.2.9 Remote Configuration ..................................................... 189
12.2.10 Camera Name Display .................................................. 189
12.2.11 Image Enhancement ..................................................... 189
12.2.12 Visual PTZ .................................................................... 190
12.2.13 I/O Control..................................................................... 193
12.2.14 Visual Automation ......................................................... 194
12.2.15 Network Status.............................................................. 195
Chapter 13 Administrator Mode ..................................196
13.1 Video and Motion ..................................................................198
13.1.1 Video Settings................................................................. 199
13.1.2 Motion Detection ............................................................. 206
13.1.3 Privacy Mask................................................................... 208
13.1.4 Text Overlay.................................................................... 209
13.1.5 Tampering Alarm............................................................. 211
13.1.6 Visual Automation ........................................................... 213
13.2 I/O Settings............................................................................215
13.2.1 Input Settings .................................................................. 215
13.2.2 Output Settings ............................................................... 217
13.2.3 PTZ Settings ................................................................... 218
13.3 Events and Alerts..................................................................219
13.3.1 E-mail ............................................................................. 220
13.3.2 FTP................................................................................. 222
13.3.3 Center V2........................................................................ 225
13.3.4 VSM................................................................................ 227
13.3.5 Backup Center ................................................................ 229
13.3.6 Video Gateway / Recording Server.................................. 232
13.3.7 ViewLog Server............................................................... 235
XI
13.3.8 RTSP .............................................................................. 236
13.4 Monitoring .............................................................................237
13.5 Recording Schedule .............................................................239
13.5.1 Recording Schedule Settings .......................................... 239
13.5.2 I/O Monitoring Settings .................................................... 240
13.6 Remote ViewLog ...................................................................241
13.7 Network .................................................................................242
13.7.1 LAN Configuration........................................................... 242
13.7.2 Wireless Client Mode ...................................................... 244
13.7.3 Advanced TCP/IP............................................................ 246
13.7.4 IP Filter Settings.............................................................. 250
13.7.5 SNMP Settings................................................................ 251
13.8 Management..........................................................................253
13.8.1 Date & Time Settings ...................................................... 253
13.8.2 GPS Maps Settings ......................................................... 255
13.8.3 Storage Settings.............................................................. 257
13.8.4 User Account .................................................................. 259
13.8.5 Log Information ............................................................... 260
13.8.6 System Log..................................................................... 261
13.8.7 Tools............................................................................... 263
Chapter 14 Recording and Playback ..........................265
14.1 Recording ..............................................................................265
14.2 Playback ................................................................................266
14.2.1 Playback Using the Memory Card.................................... 266
14.2.2 Playback over Network.................................................... 268
14.2.3 Access to the Recorded Files through FTP Server........... 269
14.2.4 Playback of Daylight Saving Time Events ........................ 269
XII
Chapter 15 Advanced Applications ............................271
15.1 Upgrading System Firmware................................................271
15.1.1 Using the Web Configuration Interface ............................ 273
15.1.2 Using the IP Device Utility ............................................... 274
15.2 Backing Up and Restoring Settings.....................................276
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default Settings .................................278
15.4 Verifying Watermark .............................................................288
15.4.1 Accessing AVI Files......................................................... 289
15.4.2 Running Watermark Proof ............................................... 290
15.4.3 The Watermark Proof Window......................................... 291
15.5 Downloading Videos from the SD Card ...............................292
15.5.1 Installing the GV-SDCardSync Utility ............................... 293
15.5.2 The GV-SDCardSync Utility Window ............................... 297
Chapter 16 DVR Configurations ..................................299
16.1 Setting up an IP Camera .......................................................303
16.1.1 Customizing IP Camera Settings ..................................... 306
16.2 Remote Monitoring with Multi View .....................................308
16.2.1 Connecting to the IP Camera .......................................... 308
16.3 Remote Monitoring with E-Map............................................309
16.3.1 Creating an E-Map for the IP Camera.............................. 309
16.3.2 Connecting to the IP Camera .......................................... 310
Chapter 17 CMS Configurations..................................311
17.1 Center V2 ...............................................................................311
17.2 VSM........................................................................................314
17.3 Dispatch Server.....................................................................315
Chapter 18 Mobile Phone Connection ........................317
18.1 PDA........................................................................................319
XIII
18.1.1 Installing GView V2 ......................................................... 319
18.1.2 Activating the GView Function......................................... 320
18.1.3 Connecting to the IP Camera .......................................... 321
18.1.4 Playing Back the Recordings from the IP Camera............ 323
18.1.5 Other Functions............................................................... 324
18.2 Windows Smartphone ..........................................................329
18.2.1 Installing MSView V2 / V3 ............................................... 329
18.2.2 Activating the MSView V2 / V3 Function .......................... 330
18.2.3 Connecting to the IP Camera .......................................... 331
18.2.4 Playing Back the Recordings from the IP Camera............ 333
18.2.5 Other Functions............................................................... 334
18.3 Symbian Smartphone ...........................................................335
18.3.1 Installing SSView V3 ....................................................... 335
18.3.2 Activating the SSView V3 Function.................................. 336
18.3.3 Connecting to the IP Camera .......................................... 337
18.3.4 Quick Connection............................................................ 338
18.3.5 Playing Back the Recordings from the IP Camera............ 338
18.3.6 Other Functions............................................................... 339
18.4 3G Mobile Phone...................................................................340
18.4.1 Activating the 3G Mobile Phone Function ........................ 340
18.4.2 Connecting to the IP Camera .......................................... 341
18.5 Android Smartphone ............................................................343
18.5.1 Connecting to GV-IPCAM H.264 ..................................... 344
18.6 iPhone, iPod Touch and iPad ...............................................347
18.6.1 Installing GV-Eye V1.0 / HD V1.0 .................................... 347
18.6.2 Connecting to GV-IPCAM H.264 ..................................... 348
Specifications: Box Camera .........................................351
Specifications: IR Arctic Box Camera .........................365
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome1 .............373
XIV
Specifications: Bullet Camera ......................................387
Specifications: PTZ Camera .........................................395
Specifications: PT Camera ...........................................400
Specifications: Vandal Proof IP Dome.........................405
Specifications: Fixed IP Dome .....................................413
Specifications: Cube Camera & Wireless Cube Camera..
.........................................................................................420
Appendix ........................................................................425
A. Settings for Internet Explorer 8 ...............................................425
B. Supported Lenses for Box Camera .........................................426
C. Resolution and Frame Rate .....................................................427
D. Support Lists ............................................................................432
E. RTSP Protocol Command ........................................................438
F. The CGI Command ...................................................................439
G. Dual Stream Support List ........................................................441
H. Power Supply Support List......................................................444
I. Supported Firmware for Flash Memory....................................445
XV
Naming and Definition
GeoVision Analog and Digital Video Recording Software.
GV-System
The GV-System also refers to GV-Multicam System,
GV-NVR System, GV-DVR System and GV-Hybrid
DVR System at the same time.
XVI
Options
Optional devices can expand your camera’s capabilities and versatility.
Contact your dealer for more information.
Device
Description
A mountable infrared LED device that improves
image performance of Box Cameras under low
GV-IR LED
light conditions. Note that the GV-IR LED is only
compatible with GV-BX110D and GV-IR LED T2
is compatible with GV-BX120D / 130D Series /
140DW / 220D Series / 320D Series / 520D-0.
GV-PA191 PoE
Adapter
The GV-PA191 PoE adapter is designed to
provide power and network connection to the
cameras over a single Ethernet cable.
The GV-Mount Accessories provide a
GV-Mount
Accessories
comprehensive lineup of accessories for
installation on ceiling, wall and pole. For details,
see GV-Mount Accessories Installation Guide on
the software CD.
XVII
Note for Connecting to GV-System
The GV-IPCAM H.264 is designed to work with GV-System, a hybrid or
digital video management system. Note the following when GV-IPCAM
H.264 is connected to GV-System:
1.
Normally, the images are recorded to the memory card inserted in the
GV-IP Camera H.264 (except GV-MFD110 and GV-IR Arctic Box
Camera). Once the camera is connected to GV-System for video
management or the camera’s Live View (Figure 11-3) is accessed
through the Web browser, the recording to the memory card will be
stopped and the recording will be taken control by GV-System. When
the connection between the camera and GV-System is interrupted,
the recording to the memory card will be resumed to back up the
images on the camera.
2.
Once the camera is connected to the GV-System, the resolution set
on the GV-System will override the resolution set on the camera’s
Web interface. You can only change the resolution settings through
the Web interface when the connection to the GV-System is
interrupted.
XVIII
Note for Adjusting Focus and
Zoom
When adjusting the Focus and Zoom Screws (on Box Camera, IR Arctic
Box Camera, Bullet Camera, Vandal Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP Camera),
please do not over tighten the Focus and Zoom screws. The screws only
need to be as tight as your finger can do it; don't bother using any tools to
get them tighter. Doing so can damage the structure of lens.
For example,
Bullet Camera
Fixed IP Camera
The maximum torque value for all the zoom and focus screws is 3.9 to
4.9 N.cm
XIX
Note for Installing Camera Outdoor
When installing the IR Arctic Box Camera, Bullet Camera, Vandal Proof
IP Dome or Mini Fixed Rugged Dome outdoor, be sure that:
1.
The camera is set up above the junction box to prevent water from
entering the camera along the cables.
2.
Any PoE, power, audio and I/O cables are waterproofed using
waterproof silicon rubber or the like.
XX
3.
After opening the camera cover, ensure the screws are tightened
and the cover is in place.
4.
To prevent the lens from fogging up, ensure to replace the silica gel
bag every time you open the camera, and conceal the gel bag in
camera within 2 minutes of exposing to open air. The silica gel bag
loses it effectiveness when the dry camera is opened
XXI
Chapter 1 Introduction
The GV-IPCAM H.264 series offers a full range of IP cameras that bring
you the advantage to instantly access live images and monitor surveillance
areas of different environmental conditions from remote sites. Ten series
are available: Box Camera, Mini Fixed Dome, Mini Fixed Rugged Dome,
Bullet Camera, PTZ Camera, PT Camera, Vandal Proof IP Dome, Fixed
IP Dome, Cube Camera and Wireless Cube Camera. For detailed
features of each model, please refer to the corresponding chapter.
Model
Model No.
1.3 MP, H.264, D/N,
Fixed Iris
Varifocal
Lens
1.3 MP, H.264, D/N,
Auto Iris
GV-BX120D
Varifocal
Lens
1.3 MP, H.264, Low
Lux, D/N, Auto Iris, f:
2.8 ~ 12 mm, F/1.4,
1/3’’ CS Lens
GV-BX130D-0
Varifocal
Lens
GV-BX130D-1
Fixed
Lens
1.3 MP, H.264 D/N,
Fixed Iris, f: 4 mm,
F/1.5, 1/3’’ CS Lens
Varifocal
Lens
1 MP, H.264 D/N
WDR Box IP Cam,
Fixed Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 12
mm, F/1.4, 1/3’’ CS
Lens
GV-BX110D
Box
Camera
Description
Fixed
Lens
1.3 MP, H.264 D/N,
GV-BX140DW
Auto Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 12
mm, F/1.4, 1/3’’ CS
Lens
Model
Model No.
Description
2 MP, H.264 D/N,
Auto Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 8.5
mm, F/1.4,
GV-BX220D-0
1/3” CS Lens
2 MP, H.264 D/N,
Auto Iris, f: 3.1 ~ 8
mm, F/1.2,
GV-BX220D-1
1/3’’ CS Lens
2 MP, H.264 D/N,
Auto Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 6
mm, F/1.3,
GV-BX220D-2
1/3’’ CS Lens
Box
Camera
GV-BX220D-3
Varifocal
Lens
2 MP, H.264 D/N,
Auto Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 12
mm, F/1.4,
1/3’’ CS Lens
3 MP, H.264 D/N,
GV-BX320D-0
Auto Iris, f: 3.1 ~ 8
mm, F/1.2,
1/3’’ CS Lens
3 MP, H.264 D/N,
GV-BX320D-1
Auto Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 6
mm, F/1.3,
1/3’’ CS Lens
GV-BX520D-0
2
5 MP, H.264 D/N,
Manual Iris,
f: 4.5 ~ 10 mm, F/1.6,
1/2’’ CS Lens
1
Model
Model No.
Description
1.3 MP, H.264,
Low Lux, D/N, Auto
Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 12 mm,
F/1.4, 1/3’’ CS
Lens
GV-BX120D-E
IR Arctic
Box
Camera
Introduction
GV-BX220D-E
Varifocal
Lens
2 MP, H.264 D/N,
Auto Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 6
mm, F/1.3,
1/3’’ CS Lens
3 MP, H.264 D/N,
Auto Iris, f: 2.8 ~ 6
mm, F/1.3,
GV-BX320D-E
1/3’’ CS Lens
5 MP, H.264 D/N,
Manual Iris, f: 4.5 ~
10 mm, F/1.6,
GV-BX520D-E
1/3’’ CS Lens
Mini Fixed
Dome
GV-MFD110
1.3 MP, H.264,
Color, Fixed Iris
GV-MFD120
1.3 MP Low Lux
H.264, Color, Fixed
Iris
GV-MFD130
Fixed
Lens
1.3 MP H.264,
Color, Fixed Iris
GV-MFD220
2 MP H.264, Color,
Fixed Iris
GV-MFD320
3 MP H.264, Color,
Fixed Iris
GV-MFD520
5 MP H.264, Color,
Fixed Iris
3
Model
Model No.
Description
1.3 MP Low Lux
H.264, Color, Fixed
Iris
GV-MDR120
Mini Fixed
Rugged
Dome
Bullet
Camera
4
GV-MDR220
Fixed
Lens
2 MP H.264, Color,
Fixed Iris
GV-MDR320
3 MP H.264, Color,
Fixed Iris
GV-MDR520
5 MP H.264, Color,
Fixed Iris
GV-BL110D
1.3 MP, H.264,
Auto Iris
GV-BL120D
1.3 MP, H.264,
Low Lux, Auto Iris
GV-BL130D
Varifocal
Lens
1.3 MP, H.264,
Auto Iris
GV-BL220D
2 MP, H.264, Auto
Iris
GV-BL320D
3 MP, H.264, Auto
Iris
PTZ
Camera
GV-PTZ010D
PT
Camera
GV-PT110D
NTSC
PAL
10x Optical Zoom,
D1, H.264, D/N,
Fixed Iris
1.3 MP, H.264,
Fixed Iris
1
Model
Model No.
Introduction
Description
GV-VD120D
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD121D
1.3 MP, H.264,
Low Lux,
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD122D
Auto Iris
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD123D
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD220D
Vandal
Proof IP
Dome
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD221D
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD222D
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
Varifocal
Lens
2 MP, H.264,
Auto Iris
GV-VD223D
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD320D
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD321D
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
3 MP, H.264,
GV-VD322D
Auto Iris
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD323D
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
1.3 MP, H.264,
Low Lux, Auto Iris
GV-FD120D
Fixed IP
Dome
GV-FD220D
GV-FD320D
Varifocal
Lens
2 MP, H.264, Auto
Iris
3 MP, H.264, Auto
Iris
5
Model
Cube
Camera
Wireless
Model No.
6
1.3 MP, H.264,
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
GV-CBW120
Cube
Camera
Description
GV-CBW220
Fixed Iris
2 MP, H.264,
Fixed
Lens
Fixed Iris
1.3 MP, H.264,
Wireless Fixed Iris
2 MP, H.264,
Wireless Fixed Iris
1
Introduction
1.1 System Requirement
To perform the GV-IPCAM H.264 operations through Web browser, ensure
your PC is in good network connection, and use one of the following web
browsers:

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.x or later

Google Chrome

Mozilla Firefox

Safari
Note:
1
For the users of Internet Explorer 8, additional settings are required.
For details, see Appendix A.
2
With non-IE browsers,
A.
Motion Detection, Tampering Alarm, Visual Automation, Text
Overlay, two-way audio and GPS map settings are not
supported.
B.
only the Play function is available on the live view window
(Figure 11-3)
C.
RTSP streaming must be kept as enabled. For more detail, see
13.3.8 RTSP.
7
Chapter 2 Box Camera
The Box Camera series offers fixed focal or varifocal models, ranging from
1.3 to 5 megapixel and is designed with an automatic infrared cut filter for
day and night surveillance.
Box Camera
Model No.
Specifications
Description
Fixed Lens
Megapixel, Fixed Iris,
f:4 mm, F/1.5, 1/3” CS
Lens
1.3 MP,
H.264, D/N
Varifocal Lens
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f:4 ~ 9 mm, F/1.4, 1/3”
CS Lens
1.3 MP,
H.264, D/N
GV-BX120D
Varifocal Lens
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f:2.8 ~ 12 mm, F/1.4,
1/3” CS Lens
1.3 MP,
H.264, Low
Lux, D/N
GV-BX130D-0
Varifocal Lens
GV-BX130D-1
Fixed Lens
GV-BX110D
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f: 2.8 ~ 12 mm, F/1.4,
1/3’’ CS Lens
Megapixel, Fixed Iris,
f: 4 mm, F/1.4,
1/3’’ CS Lens
1.3 MP,
H.264, D/N
1.3 MP,
H.264, D/N
2 Box Camera
Model No.
Specifications
Megapixel, Fixed Iris,
GV-BX140DW
f: 2.8 ~ 12 mm, F/1.4,
1/3’’ CS Lens
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f: 3.1 ~ 8 mm,
GV-BX220D-1
F/1.2, 1/3’’ CS Lens
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f: 2.8 ~ 6 mm,
GV-BX220D-2
Varifocal Lens
GV-BX320D-0
GV-BX520D-0
2 MP, H.264,
D/N
F/1.3, 1/3’’ CS Lens
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f: 2.8 ~ 12 mm, F/1.4,
1/3’’ CS Lens
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f:3.1 ~ 8 mm, F/1.2,
1/3” CS Lens
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
GV-BX320D-1
1 MP, H.264,
D/N, WDR
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f:2.8 ~ 8.5 mm, F/1.4,
1/3” CS Lens
GV-BX220D-0
GV-BX220D-3
Description
3 MP, H.264,
D/N
f: 2.8 ~ 6 mm, F/1.3,
1/3’’ CS Lens
Megapixel, Manual
Iris, f: 4.5 ~ 10 mm,
F/1.6, 1/2’’ CS Lens
5 MP, H.264,
D/N
9
2.1 Packing List

Box Camera

Terminal Block

Fixed Focal or Varifocal Megapixel Lens

Pin Wrench (for GV-BX110D only)

C-mount Lens Adapter (for GV-BX110D only)

Six Lens Rings (for GV-BX120D / 130D series / 220D series / 520D
series)

One 0.125 mm Lens Ring (for GV-BX140DW only)

Video Out Wire (not available for GV-BX110D)

DC 12V Power Adapter

GV-IPCAM H.264 Software CD

GV-IPCAM H.264 Quick Start Guide

GV-NVR Software DVD

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
10
2 Box Camera
2.2 Features


1.3 / 2 / 3 / 5 megapixel progressive scan CMOS
Dual video streams
For GV-BX110D: Dual streams from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
For Box Camera (except GV-BX110D): Stream 1 from H.264 or
MJPEG; Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG

Frame rate:
Camera Model
Frame Rate
GV-BX110D
Up to 15 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-BX140DW
Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 720
GV-BX220D Series
Up to 30 fps at 1920 x 1080
GV-BX320D Series
Up to 20 fps at 2048 x 1536
GV-BX520D-0
Up to 10 fps at 2560 x 1920

Day / Night function (with removable IR-cut filter)

Wide dynamic range (for GV-BX140DW only)

Two-way audio

One sensor input and alarm output

TV-out support

Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot

Motion detection

Tampering alarm

Visual automation

Privacy mask

Text overlay

IP address filtering

Power supply: DC 12V and PoE

Megapixel lens
11

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
2.2.1 GV-BX140DW with WDR Function
GV-BX140DW is equipped with a wide dynamic range (WDR) sensor. The
special sensor can deal with the scenes having a large difference in
foreground and background light intensities, and heighten the details
visible in the camera view. An example of WDR in action is shown below.
The first image shows the image from a camera without the WDR function
and the second image shows how it looks with WDR function.
No WDR: underexposure
WDR: perfect exposure
12
2 Box Camera
2.3 Overview
2.3.1 GV-BX110D
Figure 2-1
Note: The Zoom Screw and Auto Iris Connector are only available in
the varifocal model.
13
No.
1
2
Name
Audio Out
Audio In
3
Default
4
Memory Card Slot
5
Video Out
6
7
8
9
I/O Terminal Block
LAN / PoE
DC 12V Connector
Status LED
10
Zoom Screw
11
12
Focus Screw
Microphone
13
Auto Iris Connector
14
Description
Connects a speaker for audio output.
Connects a microphone for audio input.
Resets all configurations of the GV-IPCAM
H.264 to the default factory settings. See
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default Settings.
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
Connects to a portable monitor for setting
the focus and angle of Box Camera during
initial installation.
For details, see 2.6 I/O Terminal Block.
Connects to a 10/100 Ethernet or PoE.
Connects to power.
See Status LED later in this chapter.
Adjusts the zoom of the camera. This
screw is not available for GV-BX110D
fixed lens type.
Adjusts the focus of the camera.
Records the sounds.
If the varifocal lens is in use, plug the iris
control cable to the connector. Note that
Auto Iris Connector is not functional in
fixed focal GV-BX110D.
2 Box Camera
Status LED
The status LED is used to reflect the system status of the camera.
Status LED
Description
Red Light ON
The system powers on and succeeds to
boot up.
Flashing Red and Green
The camera is ready for use with network
Lights
connectivity.
Green Light ON
Error occurs on the system.
15
2.3.2 GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series /
320D Series / 520D-0
Figure 2-2
Note:
1.
The Light Sensor (No.11) is only available in GV-BX140DW. Keep
the Light Sensor unobscured for accurate light detection.
2.
The Iris Screw (No.13) is only available for GV-BX520D-0.
3.
The Zoom Screw (No. 15) is not available for GV-BX110D (fixed
lens model) and GV-BX130D-1.
16
2 Box Camera
No.
Name
1
Video Out
2
Memory Card Slot
3
4
5
6
Audio Out
Audio In
I/O Terminal Block
Power LED
7
Auto Iris Connector
8
9
10
DC 12V Port
LAN / PoE
Default
11
Light Sensor
12
13
14
Focus Screw
Iris Screw
Microphone
Description
Connects to a portable monitor for setting
the focus and angle of Box Camera during
initial installation.
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
Connects a speaker for audio output.
Connects a microphone for audio input.
For details, see 2.6 I/O Terminal Block.
Indicates the power is supplied.
Plug the iris control cable to the connector.
Note that Auto Iris Connector is not
functional in GV-BX130D-1, GV-BX140DW
and GV-BX520D-0.
Connects to power.
Connects to a 10/100 Ethernet or PoE.
Resets all configurations of the GV-IPCAM
H.264 to the default factory settings. See
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default Settings.
Detects light to switch between day and
night mode.
Adjusts the focus of the camera.
Adjusts the iris of the camera.
Records the sounds.
15
16
Zoom Screw
Status LED
Adjusts the zoom of the camera.
Turns on when the unit is ready for use.
17
2.4 Connecting the Camera
The Box Camera is designed for indoor use. Please make sure the
installing site is shielded from rain and moisture.
2.4.1 GV-BX110D
3
3
4
7
3
6
2
Figure 2-3
18
5
2 Box Camera
1.
If you are using the auto iris model, plug the iris control cable to the
Auto Iris Connector on the camera.
2.
Use a standard network cable to connect the camera to your network.
3.
Optionally connect a speaker and an external microphone.
4.
Optionally connect a monitor using an RCA video-out wire. Enable
this function by selecting your signal format at the TV Out field on the
Web interface. See 13.1.1 Video Settings.
5.
Connect power using one of the following methods:


plugging the supplied power adapter to the DC jack.
using the Power over Ethernet (PoE) function and the power will
be provided over the network cable.
6.
Optionally connect to input / output devices or an infrared illuminator.
For details, see 2.5.2 Infrared Illuminator and 2.6 I/O Terminal Block.
7.
The status LED of the camera will be red.
8.
You are ready to access the live view, adjust the image clarity and
configure the basics. See Getting Started, Chapter 11.
19
2.4.2 GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series /
320D Series / 520D-0
Figure 2-4
1.
If you are using the auto iris model, plug the iris control cable to the
Auto Iris Connector on the camera.
2.
Use a standard network cable to connect the camera to your network.
3.
Optionally connect a speaker and an external microphone.
4.
Optionally connect a monitor using a Video Out wire. Enable this
function by selecting your signal format at the TV Out field on the
Web interface. See 13.1.1 Video Settings.
5.
Optionally connect to input / output devices or an infrared illuminator.
For details, see 2.5.2 Infrared Illuminator and 2.6 I/O Terminal Block.
6.
Connect power using one of the following methods:
7.
20


plugging the supplied power adapter to the power port.
using the Power over Ethernet (PoE) function and the power will
be provided over the network cable.
The status LED of the camera will be on.
2 Box Camera
8.
You are ready to access the live view, adjust the image clarity and
configure the basics. See Getting Started, Chapter 11.
21
2.5 Accessory Installation
2.5.1 C-Mount Lenses
If you use a C-mount lens, it requires a certain distance from the camera’s
imaging chip to focus the lens. Mount the supplied C-mount lens adapter /
lens ring to the camera, and then attach the lens onto the camera body.

GV-BX110D
Install the supplied C-mount lens adapter to extend focal length of GVBX110D as illustrated below.
C-mount lens adapter
Figure 2-5
22
2 Box Camera
GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series / 320D Series /

520D-0
Three types of C-mount lens rings are provided for GV-BX120D / 130D
Series / 220D Series / 320D Series / 520D-0:

0.188 mm (transparent color) x 2

0.125 mm (black color with a glossy surface) x 2

0.254 mm (black color with a matt surface) x 2
For GV-BX140DW, a 0.125 mm is provided.
Note: The C-mount lens rings are specially designed for GV-BX120D /
130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series / 320D Series / 520D-0. Besides
the supplied C-mount lens rings, each of these models has already
included with the necessary lens ring.
Figure 2-6
23
2.5.2 Infrared Illuminators (Optional)
If you use an infrared (IR) illuminator with I/O function, follow the steps
below to install it.
1.
Connect the infrared illuminator to the terminal block on the camera.
See 2.6 The I/O Terminal Block.
2.
3.
Access the Web interface of the camera.
Select Video and Motion, select Video Settings, select Streaming 1
and set the IR Check Function option to be Trigger by Input or
Trigger IR by D/N.
4.
Click Apply.
For the Trigger by Input or Trigger IR by D/N function and D/N sensitivity
settings, see 13.1.1 Video Settings.
24
2 Box Camera
2.6 I/O Terminal Block
The terminal block, located on the back panel of the Box Camera, provides
the interface to one input and one output devices. The I/O terminal block
can be used for applications such as motion detection, event alerts via EMail and FTP, and center monitoring through Center V2 and VSM.
2.6.1 Pin Assignment
The pin assignment for the I/O terminal block:

GV-BX110D
Pin
12345
Figure 2-7
Function
1
Input +
2
Input -
3
Output Common
4
Output N/C
5
Output N/O
The GV-BX110D only supports the input device of Wet Contact, 7V ~ 30V.
For the output point, please check if your output device meets the following
Absolute Maximum Ratings before connecting it to the output point.
Breakdown Voltage
277V AC, 30V DC
Continuous Load Current
5A (NO), 3A (NC)
Note: Absolute Maximum Ratings are those values beyond which
damage to the camera may occur. Continuous operation of the camera at
the absolute rating level may affect the camera reliability.
25

GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series / 320D Series /
520D-0
The GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series / 320D Series /
520D-0 support one digital input and one digital output of dry contact.
Pin
Figure 2-8
Function
1
Digital Input
2
GND
3
Digital Output
For details on how to enable an installed I/O device, see 13.2 I/O Settings.
26
2 Box Camera
2.6.2 Connecting to GV-Relay V2 (Optional)
The Box Camera (except GV-BX110D) can only drive a maximum load of
200mA 5V DC. Connect the camera to a GV-Relay V2 module (optional
product) to expand the maximum voltage load. See a comparison on
maximum voltage loads with and without GV-Relay:
Models
Maximum Voltage Load
Without GV-Relay V2
With GV-Relay V2
10A 250V AC
GV-BX110D
10A 125V AC
N/A
5A 100V DC
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
10A 250V AC,
200 mA 5V DC
GV-BX320D Series
10A 125V AC,
5A 100V DC
GV-BX520D-0
Note: GV-BX110D contains built-in relay. Therefore, it does not require
a GV-Relay to maximize its voltage load.
27
To connect the Box Camera to GV-Relay V2, refer to the figure and table
below.
Figure 2-9
GV-Relay V2
I/O Terminal Block
COM
Pin 2 (GND)
DO1
Pin 3 (Digital Output)
28
Chapter 3 IR Arctic Box Camera
The IR Arctic Box Camera series is a variant of the Box Camera series.
They are outdoor cameras with IP66 rating. They are designed for day and
night surveillance in environments with extreme temperatures.
IR Arctic Box Camera
Model No.
Specifications
Description
GV-BX120D-E
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f: 2.8 ~ 12 mm, F/1.4,
1/3” CS Lens
1.3 MP,
H.264, Low
Lux, D/N
GV-BX220D-E
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f: 2.8 ~ 6 mm,
F/1.3, 1/3’’ CS Lens
2 MP, H.264,
D/N
Varifocal Lens
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
f: 2.8 ~ 6 mm, F/1.3,
1/3’’ CS Lens
Megapixel, Manual
Iris, f: 4.5 ~ 10 mm,
F/1.6, 1/2’’ CS Lens
3 MP, H.264,
D/N
5 MP, H.264,
D/N
3.1 Packing List

IR Arctic Box Camera

Screw Anchor x 4

Screw x 4

Washer x 4

Big Torx Wrench

Small Torx Wrench

Silica Gel Bag x 2

Sticker x 2

GV-PA481

GV-PA481 Power Cord

GV-IPCAM H.264 Software CD

GV-IPCAM H.264 Quick Start Guide

GV-NVR Software DVD

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
30
3 IR Arctic Box Camera
3.2 Features

1.3 / 2 / 3 / 5 megapixel progressive scan CMOS

Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG; Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or
MJPEG

Frame rate:

Camera Model
Frame Rate
GV-BX120D-E
Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-BX220D-E
Up to 30 fps at 1920 x 1080
GV-BX320D-E
Up to 20 fps at 2048 x 1536
GV-BX520D-E
Up to 10 fps at 2560 x 1920
Day / Night function (with removable IR-cut filter)

IP66 rating

Built-in heater and fan

Support for TV-out

Two-way audio

Motion detection

Tampering alarm

Privacy mask

Text overlay

IP address filtering

Power supplied through PoE (IEEE 802.3at)

Megapixel lens

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
31
3.3 Overview
Figure 3-1
Note: The Iris Screw (No. 7) is only available in GV-BX520D-E.
No.
32
Name
1
Silica gel bag
2
3
4
5
6
7
IR power plug
Focus Screw
Module screw
Status LED
Zoom Screw
Iris Screw
Description
Desiccant that keeps the camera housing
dry.
Supplies power to the built-in IR LEDs.
Adjusts the focus of the camera.
Holds the module in place.
Turns on when the unit is ready for use.
Adjusts the zoom of the camera.
Adjusts the iris of the camera.
3 IR Arctic Box Camera
3.4 Installation
The IR Arctic Box Camera is designed for outdoor use.
1.
Mark the installation site and drill four holes for screw anchors.
2.
Insert the supplied screw anchors.
3.
Secure the camera to the wall using the supplied washers and screws.
Figure 3-2
4.
Connect the camera to the network and supply power via the PoE
cable. See 3.5 Connecting the Camera.
5.
6.
Access the live view. See 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
Based on the live view, adjust the angle of the camera. Loosen the
indicated screw with the supplied big torx wrench and adjust the joint.
Figure 3-3
33
Tilt Adjustment
Figure 3-4
Pan Adjustment
Figure 3-5
7.
Based on the live view, adjust the focus, zoom and iris (in GVBX520D-E only) of the camera.
Unscrew the cover with the supplied small torx wrench.
Figure 3-6
34
3 IR Arctic Box Camera
Hold the connectors and unplug them.
Figure 3-7
Important: Unscrew and remove the cover carefully. Pulling the cover
off may cause damages to the inner wiring of the camera.
Adjust the focus, zoom and iris screws.
Figure 3-8
35
8.
Replace the silica gel bag. Paste the sticker to the front side of the
silica gel bag. Press the sticker several times to make sure it adheres
properly. Paste the silica gel bag to the indicated place.
Figure 3-9
Important:
1.
Be sure that the new silica gel bag is concealed in the camera
housing within 2 minutes of exposing to open air.
2.
To prevent the lens from fogging up, you must replace the silica
gel bag every time you open the camera. The gel bag loses its
effectiveness when the dry camera is opened.
9.
36
Refer to step 7 to plug the connectors and secure the camera cover.
3 IR Arctic Box Camera
3.5 Connecting the Camera
3.5.1 Wire Definition
Figure 3-10
No.
Wire Color
Definition
1
Black (thick)
PoE
2
Black BNC
TV out
3
Green RCA
Audio Out
4
Pink RCA
Audio In
1.
Optionally connect a speaker (green) and an external microphone
(pink).
2.
Optionally connect a monitor using a Video Out wire. Enable this
function by selecting your signal format at the TV Out field on the
Web interface. See 13.1.1 Video Settings.
37
3.
Connect the camera’s cable to the GV-PA481 PoE adapter as
illustrated below. The power and network will be supplied
simultaneously.
Figure 3-11
4.
The status LED of the camera will be on.
5.
You are ready to access the live view, adjust the image clarity and
configure the basics. See Getting Started, Chapter 11.
38
3 IR Arctic Box Camera
3.6 Notice for Using the IR Arctic Box Camera
Ensure that you:

enable IR LED function on the Web interface after loading the default
settings.

disable the status LED to reduce reflection when a green light spot
appears on the live view.
3.6.1 Enabling IR LED after Loading Default
Each GV-BX-E series is equipped with 4 IR LEDs to provide infrared
illumination at night. The factory loaded setting for the IR LED function is
enabled. If you have restored the camera to default settings, please follow
the steps below to enable the IR LED function.
1.
In the left menu of Web interface, select Video Settings and then
Streaming 1.
2.
Enable Trigger IR by D/N in IR Check Function.
Figure 3-11
3.
Click Apply.
39
3.6.2 Disabling Status LED under Low Light Conditions
If you have a green light spot on the live view, this is likely due to
insufficient light at the installation site, which causes the status LED to
reflect on the camera cover. In this case, it is advisable that you disable the
status LED.
1.
In the left menu of Web interface, select Video Settings and then
Streaming 1.
2.
Select Disable in LED Control.
Figure 3-12
3.
40
Click Apply.
Chapter 4 Mini Fixed Dome & Mini
Fixed Rugged Dome
The Mini Fixed Dome is a fixed, mini-sized ceiling-mount network camera.
Two series are available, the Mini Fixed Dome series, which are designed
for indoor surveillance and the Mini Fixed Rugged Dome series for outdoor
environments. Both series are equipped with built-in microphone and are
adjustable in 2-axis (pan and tilt for GV-MFD series) or in 3 axis (pan, tilt
and rotate for GV-MDR series).
Model No.
Specifications
Description
Megapixel, Fixed
GV-MFD110
Iris, f: 3.6 mm,
1.3 MP, H.264,
F/1.8, 1/3’’ M12
Color
Mount
Megapixel, Fixed
GV-MFD120
Iris, f: 4.05 mm,
1.3 MP, H.264,
GV-MDR120
F/1.5, 1/3’’ M12
Low Lux, Color
Mount
Megapixel, Fixed
GV-MFD130
Fixed Lens
Iris, f: 2.54 mm,
1.3 MP, H.264,
F/2.8, 1/2.5’’ M12
Color
Mount
2 MP, H.264,
GV-MFD220
GV-MDR220
GV-MFD320
GV-MDR320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR520
Megapixel, Fixed
Iris, f: 2.54 mm,
F/2.8, 1/2.5’’ M12
Mount
Color
3 MP, H.264,
Color
5 MP, H.264,
Color
4.1 Packing List

Mini Fixed Dome or Mini Fixed Rugged Dome

Torx Wrench

Self Tapping Screw x 2

Screw Anchor x 2

Cable stopper x 1

Installation sticker (for GV-MDR series only)

Silica gel bag x 2 (for GV-MDR series only)

Ferrite core for vehicle installation

3-pin terminal block (for GV-MFD120 / 130 / 220 / 320 / 520 only)

DC 12V Power Adapter (for GV-MFD120 / 130 / 220 / 320 / 520 only)

GV-IPCAM H.264 Software CD

GV-IPCAM H.264 Quick Start Guide

GV-NVR Software DVD

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
42
4
Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
4.2 Features

1/3’’ progressive scan CMOS

Megapixel lens

Dual video streams
Camera Model
GV-MFD110
Frame Rate
Dual video streams from two of H.264,
MPEG4 or MJPEG
GV-MFD series
(except GV-MFD110)
GV-MDR series

Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG; Stream
2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
Frame rate:
Camera Model
Frame Rate
GV-MFD110
Up to 15 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-MDR120
GV-MFD220
GV-MDR220
GV-MFD320
GV-MDR320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR520
Up to 30 fps at 1920 x 1080
Up to 20 fps at 2048 x 1536
Up to 10 fps at 2560 x 1920
43

Day and night function (electronic)

IK7 rating (for GV-MDR series only)

IP66 rating (for GV-MDR series only)

Endurable to low environment temperatures (-20°C ~ 50°C / -4°F ~
122°F) (for GV-MDR series only)

2-axis mechanism (GV-MFD series); 3-axis mechanism (GV-MDR
series)
Camera Type
Pan
Tilt
Rotate
GV-MFD series
-45° ~ +45°
0° ~ 90°
n/a
GV-MDR series
-45° ~ +45°
0° ~ 90°
0° ~ 360°

Built-in microphone

Motion detection

Tampering alarm

Privacy mask

Text overlay

IP address filtering

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
44
4
Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
4.3 Overview
4.3.1 GV-MFD110
Figure 4-1
No.
Name
1
Default Button
2
3
4
5
6
7
Lens
Focus Screw
Tilt Screw
Built-In Microphone
Pan Screw
Network / PoE
Connection
Description
Resets the camera to factory default. See
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default Settings.
Rotates the les right/left to adjust focus.
Loosens the screw to adjust the focus.
Loosens the screw to adjust the tilt angle.
Provides one-way audio.
Loosens the screw to pan.
Connects the Network cable for power
and Ethernet connection.
45
4.3.2 GV-MFD120 / 130 / 220 / 320 / 520
Figure 4-2
No.
46
Name
1
Default Button
2
3
4
5
6
Lens
Tilt Screw
Built-In Microphone
Pan Screw
LED Indicators
7
Memory Card Slot
Description
Resets the camera to factory default. See
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default Settings.
Receives image inputs.
Loosens the screw to adjust tilt angle.
Provides one-way audio.
Loosens the screw to pan.
See LED Indicators below.
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
4
LED Name
1. Link
2. ACT
3. PWR
4. SW RDY (Status)
Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
Description
Turns on when the network is connected.
Turns on when data are being transmitted.
Turns on when power is on.
Turns on when the system is ready.
4.3.3 GV-MDR120 / 220 / 320 / 520
Figure 4-3
No.
1
2
Name
Silica gel bag
Conceal paper
3
4
5
6
Lens
Rotation Disc
Pan Disc
Tilt Screw
Description
Absorbs the moisture inside the camera.
Prevents water or moisture from entering
the camera.
Receives image inputs.
Rotates the camera lens.
Pans the camera lens.
Loosens to tilt the camera.
47
No.
7
Name
Built-In Microphone
8
Default Button
9
Power and status
LED
10
LAN LED
11
Memory Card Slot
Description
Provides one-way audio.
Resets the camera to factory default. See
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default
Settings.
Turns red when the power is on. Flashes
orange light twice when the system is
ready.
Turns on when the network is connected.
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
IMPORTANT: In case of damage and possible condensation inside the
camera housing, be sure not touch or remove the conceal paper.
48
4
Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
4.4 Installation
To install a Mini Fixed Dome, make sure the installing site is shielded from
rain and moisture.
4.4.1 GV-MFD Series
1.
2.
Unscrew the housing cover using the supplied torx wrench.
Put the camera on the desired location and make 2 marks on the
ceiling for screw anchors. If you want to run the cables inside the
ceiling, make a round mark with a diameter of 2.5 cm.
3.
Drill the marks and insert the screw anchors.
4.
Secure the Mini Fixed Dome to the ceiling with the self-tapping
screws.
5.
Connect the camera to network and power. For details, see 4.5
Connecting the Camera.
6.
7.
Access the live view. For details, see 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
Adjust the angles based on the live view.
Pan Adjustment
Figure 4-4
49
Tilt Adjustment
Figure 4-5
8.
For GV-MFD110, adjust image clarity using the GV-IP Device Utility
program. For details, see 11.2 Adjusting Image Clarity.
9.
Except for GV-MFD110, insert a Micro SD/SDHC card into the
memory card slot (No. 7, Figure 4-2).
10. Secure the housing cover using the supplied torx wrench.
11. Optionally conceal the cable opening with the supplied cable stopper.
Figure 4-6
50
4
Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
4.4.2 GV-MDR Series
1.
Paste the installation sticker on the desired location. The arrow should
point toward the direction that the camera faces.
2.
Drill one hole on each of the two curves for screw anchors. Drill the
circle (30 mm in diameter) if you want to run the cable into the ceiling.
30 mm
Drill a hole
on each
Figure 4-7
3.
Insert the screw anchors.
4.
Unscrew the housing cover using the supplied torx wrench.
5.
Secure the camera body to the ceiling with the self-tapping screws.
Figure 4-8
6.
Connect the camera to PoE cable.
51
7.
Access the live view. For details, see 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
8.
Adjust the angles based on the live view.
Pan Adjustment
Figure 4-9
Tilt Adjustment
Figure 4-10
Rotational Adjustment
Figure 4-11
52
4
9.
Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
Insert a Micro SD/SDHC card into the memory card slot (No. 9, Figure
4-3).
10. Secure the housing cover using the supplied torx wrench.
11. Optionally conceal the cable opening with the supplied cable stopper.
Figure 4-12
53
4.5 Connecting the Camera
Refer to the wire definition and illustrations below to connect the power and
network.
4.5.1 Wire Definition
GV-MFD120 / 130 / 220 / 320 / 520
The data cable provides connections for power and network access. The
wires are illustrated and defined below:
Figure 4-13
No.
1
2
3
Wire Color
Yellow
Orange
Gray
Definition
DC 12V+
GND
PoE, Ethernet
GV-MFD110 and GV-MDR120 / 220 / 320 / 520
Power and network connectivity is provided through a PoE cable.
Wire Color
Gray
54
Definition
PoE, Ethernet
4
Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
4.5.2 Power and Network Connection
For GV-MFD120 / 130 / 220 / 320 / 520, there are two ways to supply
power to the camera:

Use a Power over Ethernet (PoE) adapter to connect the camera to
the network, and the power will be provided at the same time.

Use the supplied 3-pin Terminal Block and power adapter. Follow the
steps below to connect the Terminal Block and power adapter.
1.
Insert the orange wire of the Mini Fixed Dome (except GV-MFD110)
to the left pin and the yellow wire to the right pin of the supplied
terminal block.
Figure 4-14
2.
Connect the DC 12V Power Adapter to the 3-Pin Terminal Block.
Figure 4-15
3.
Connect the camera to network using a network cable.
55
4.5.3 Vehicle Installation
To install the Mini Fixed Rugged Dome on a vehicle, clip the ferrite core
to the camera cable. In accordance to EN 50155, the ferrite core is used
for reduction of the cable-based and radiated interferences, ensuring stable
image quality. The ferrite core must be attached as close as possible to the
camera with the maximum distance of 15 cm.
Figure 4-16
56
Chapter 5 Bullet Camera
The Bullet Cameras is specifically designed for outdoors and is weathersealed and IP66 rating. The camera also features IR LEDs for infrared
illumination in night vision applications. Four models are available:
Model No.
Specifications
GV-BL110D
1.3 MP, H.264
1.3 MP, H.264,
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
Description
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
Varifocal Lens
f: 3.6 ~ 9 mm, F/1.3,
1/3’’ ø 14 mm Lens
Mount
Low Lux
1.3 MP, H.264
2 MP, H.264
3 MP, H.264
5.1 Packing List

Bullet Camera

Lens (Megapixel and Built-In 16 IR LEDs)

Self Tapping Screw x 3

Plastic Screw Anchor x 3

Torx Wrench x 2

Sun-Shield Cover Kit (1 Sun-Shield Cover, 2 Philips Head Screws, 2
Plastic Screw Spacers and 2 Hexagon Screws included)

Silica Gel Bag x 2

3-Pin Terminal Block

DC 12V Power Adapter

GV-IPCAM H.264 Software CD

GV-IPCAM H.264 Quick Start Guide

GV-NVR Software DVD

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
58
5
Bullet Camera
5.2 Features

1/3’’ progressive scan CMOS for GV-BL110D / 120D
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS for GV-BL130D / 220D / 320D

Dual video streams
GV-BL110D: Dual streams from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
GV-BL120D / 220D / 320D: Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG; Stream
2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG

Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 1024 for GV-BL120D / 130D
Up to 30 fps at 1920 x 1080 for GV-BL220D
Up to 20 fps at 2048 x 1536 for GV-BL320D

Intelligent IR

Day and night function (with removable IR-cute filter)

IP66 rating

Cable-concealed bracket preventing cable from being cut

One alarm input and sensor output

Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot

Two-way audio

Motion detection

Tampering alarm

Visual automation

Text overlay

Privacy mask

IP address filtering

DC 12V / AC 24V / PoE

Megapixel lens

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
59
5.3 Overview
2
1
3
4
Figure 5-1
No.
Name
Description
1
Memory Card Slot
Receives a Micro SD/SDHC memory card.
2
Zoom Screw
Holds the zoom lens in place.
3
Focus Screw
Holds the focus lens in place
4
Default Button
Resets all configurations to factory default.
See 15.3. Restoring to Factory Default
Settings.
60
5
Bullet Camera
5.4 Installation
These instructions describe the basic installation of the Bullet Camera.
1.
Slide the cable clamp to the camera base.
Figure 5-2
2.
Install the Bullet Camera to the wall.
Figure 5-3
3.
4.
Remove the protection sticker from the camera’s cover
Connect the power, network and other wires to the Bullet Camera.
See 5.4.1 Connecting the Camera.
61
5.
6.
Access the live view. For details, see 11.1. Accessing the Live View.
Adjust angles of the camera body based on the live view. Three
shafts can be adjusted. See 5.4.2 Adjusting the Angles.
7.
Loosen the camera’s cover, adjust the focus of the camera and
optionally insert a micro SD card into the SD card slot. See 5.4.3
Adjusting Lens and Inserting a Micro SD Card.
8.
9.
Fasten the camera’s cover.
Install the sun-shield cover to the Bullet Camera. For details, see
5.4.4 Installing the Sun-Shield Cover.
5.4.1 Connecting the Camera
Wire Definition
The 7-Pin Data Cable provides connections for power, ground, 1 sensor
input, 1 alarm output, audio input and audio output. The wires are
illustrated and defined below:
Figure 5-4
62
5
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Wire Color
Red
Brown
Orange
Black
Yellow
Red RCA
Green RCA
Bullet Camera
Definition
Digital In
DC 12V+ / AC 24VDigital Out
DC 12V- / AC 24V+
Ground
Audio in
Audio out
Power Connection
There are two ways to supply power to the camera:

Use a Power over Ethernet (PoE) adapter to connect the camera to
the network, and the power will be provided at the same time.

Use the supplied 3-pin Terminal Block and power adapter. Follow the
steps below to connect the Terminal Block and the power adapter.
1.
Insert the black wire of the Bullet Camera to the left-side pin of
the 3-Pin Terminal Block and the brown wire to the right-side pin.
Figure 5-5
2.
Connect the DC 12V Power Adapter to the 3-Pin Terminal Block.
Figure 5-6
Note: A DC 12V power adapter is provided in the package, but both AC
24V power adapter and DC 12V power adapters are compatible.
63
Voltage Load Expansion (Optional)
The camera can only drive a maximum load of 200mA 5V DC. Connect the
camera to a GV-Relay V2 module (optional product) to expand the
maximum voltage load. See a comparison on maximum voltage loads with
and without GV-Relay below:
Maximum Voltage Load
Models
Without GV-Relay V2
With GV-Relay V2
GV-BL110D
10A 250V AC,
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
64
200mA 5V DC
10A 125V AC,
5A 100V DC
5
Bullet Camera
To connect the GV-Relay V2 module to the Bullet Camera, refer to the
figure and table below.
Output Devices
Connect to Power
Figure 5-7
GV-Relay V2
Bullet Camera
COM
Ground (Yellow)
DO1
Digital Out (Orange)
65
5.4.2 Adjusting the Angles
The Bullet Camera is designed to be adjustable in three shafts for easy
and flexible installation.
First Shaft
You can adjust the camera body by 360 degrees to the right or the left.
1.
Unscrew the panning lock screw with the torx wrench.
Panning Lock Screw
Torx Wrench
Figure 5-8
2.
Adjust the angle of camera body to the right or the left, and fasten the
panning lock screw.
0 ~ 360°
Figure 5-9
66
5
Bullet Camera
Second Shaft
You can adjust the camera body up and down by 90, 112.5, 135, 157.5 or
180 degrees by using the gears inside the camera body and the camera
base.
1.
Unscrew the tilting lock screw with the torx wrench.
Tilting Lock Screw
Torx Wrench
Figure 5-10
2.
Hold the camera body, and move the camera base to the right to
separate the camera gears.
Figure 5-11
67
3.
Adjust the angle of camera body to 90, 112.5, 135, 157.5 or 180
degrees. Then move the camera base to the left to combine the gears.
Figure 5-12
4.
Fasten the tilting lock screw.
Third Shaft
You can adjust the camera base by 360 degrees.
1.
Unscrew the base fixing screw with the torx wrench.
Base Fixing Screw
Figure 5-13
68
Torx Wrench
5
2.
Bullet Camera
Adjust the angle of camera base, and fasten the base fixing screw.
Figure 5-14
69
5.4.3 Adjusting Lens and Inserting a Micro SD Card
To adjust the camera’s lens to produce a clear image and insert a micro
SD card into the SD card slot, follow the steps below.
1.
Loosen the camera’s cover.
Figure 5-15
2.
Remove the silica gel bag.
Figure 5-16
3.
Adjust for image clarity using GV-IP Device Utility. For details, see
11.2 Adjusting Image Clarity.
70
5
4.
Bullet Camera
If you want to insert a micro SD/SDHC card, follow the steps below.
A.
Loosen the fixing screw.
Figure 5-17
B.
Slightly pull out the camera module.
C.
Insert a micro SD/SDHC card into the memory card slot.
Figure 5-18
D.
5.
Push the camera module back and fasten the fixing screw.
Insert a new silica gel bag to the camera module and fasten the
camera’s cover within 2 minutes of opening the silica gel bag package.
Note: The silica gel loses its effectiveness after you open the dry
camera. To prevent the lens from fogging up, it is highly recommended
to replace the silica gel bag every time when you open the camera.
71
5.4.4 Installing the Sun-Shield Cover
After setting up the Bullet Camera, now you can install the sun-shield cover
to the camera.
1.
Fasten the hexagon screws either on top or below the camera.
Figure 5-19
2.
Put the sun-shield cover on top of hexagon screws. Make sure to aim
the rear hexagon screw at the edge of the sun-shield cover’s aperture
for optimal sun-shield performance.
Figure 5-20
3.
Fasten the Philips head screws with the plastic screw spacers.
Figure 5-21
72
Chapter 6 PTZ Camera
The GV-PTZ010D camera is a ceiling-mount device that provides panning,
tilting and zooming functions. The camera is designed to monitor a wide
area and also to focus on a specific part on the live view when suspicious
events occur. There are two models:
Model
GV-PTZ010D
Model No.
GV-PTZ010D-N
GV-PTZ010D-P
Description
NTSC, IPCAM, 10x Optical Zoom,
D1, H.264, Fixed Iris
PAL, IPCAM, 10x Optical Zoom,
D1, H.264, Fixed Iris
6.1 Packing List

GV-PTZ010D

Mounting Base

Mounting Cover

Wall Mount Bracket

Screw Anchor x 3

Long Screw x 3

Short Screw x 3

Round Screw x 3

DC 12V Power Adapter

Washer x 3

GV-PTZ010D Software CD

GV-PTZ110D / GV-PTZ010D
Quick Start Guide

74
GV-NVR Software DVD

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
6 PTZ Camera
6.2 Features

1/4" CCD image sensor

Dual streams from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG

Up to 30 fps at 704 x 480 / Up to 25 fps at 704 x 576

Day and night function (electronic)

10x optical zoom lens

10x digital zoom

Pan and tilt (Pan: -175° ~ 175°; Tilt: -45° ~ 90°)

Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot

Two-way audio

One sensor input and alarm output

Input-triggered Preset points

Motion detection

Privacy mask

IP address filtering

DC 12 V / AC 24 V / PoE

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
75
6.3 Overview
Figure 6-1
No.
2
Name
DC 12V / AC 24V
Terminal Block
LAN/PoE
3
I/O Terminal Block
For details, see 6.7 I/O Terminal Block.
4
Memory Card Slot
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
5
Audio Out
Connects a speaker for audio output.
6
Audio In
Connects a microphone for audio input.
Status LED
Turns green when the system operates
normally and turns off when system error
occurs.
1
7
76
Description
Connects to a DV 12V or AC 24V Power
Adapter.
Connects to a 10/100 Ethernet or PoE.
6 PTZ Camera
No.
Name
8
Power LED
9
Microphone
10
Default
Description
Turns green when the power is on and
turns off when the power is off.
Records the sounds.
Resets to system default settings. For
details, see 15.3 Restoring to Factory
Default Settings.
77
6.4 Installation
The GV-PTZ010D / GV-PT110D camera is designed for indoor usage.
Please make sure that the installing location is shielded from rain and
moisture. There are two ways to mount the PTZ / PT Camera: Ceiling
Mount and L-Shaped Wall Mount.
6.4.1 Ceiling Mount
1.
Use the mounting base to make 3 marks on the wall for screw
anchors.
Figure 6-2
2.
3.
Drill the marks and insert 3 screw anchors.
Attach the mounting base with the PTZ / PT Camera with 3 short
screws.
Figure 6-3
78
6 PTZ Camera
4.
Fix the mounting base (now with the PTZ / PT Camera attached) to
the wall with 3 long screws.
Figure 6-4
5.
Put on the mounting cover. To fit the installation environment, you can
cut the parts indicated by arrows to make an opening for wires and
cables.
Figure 6-5
79
6.4.2 L-Shaped Wall Mount
You may wall-mount the GV-PTZ010D / GV-PT110D camera with or
without the mounting cover.
1.
Take the wall mount bracket and make 2 marks on the wall for
screw anchors.
Figure 6-6
2.
Drill the marks and insert 2 screw anchors.
3.
Insert the long screws and leave enough distance (approximately 2
mm) to hang the wall mount bracket later.
Figure 6-7
80
6 PTZ Camera
4.
Hang the wall mount bracket on the screws and push the wall mount
bracket downward. Make sure the long screws are tightened.
Figure 6-8
5.
Without Mounting Cover

Attach the wall mount bracket with the PTZ / PT Camera using 3
washers and 3 round screws.
Figure 6-9
81
With Mounting Cover

To install the mounting cover, attach the mounting base to the
camera and then put on the mounting cover. See steps 3 and 5
in the Ceiling Mount section.

Attach the wall mount bracket with the PTZ / PT Camera using 3
round screws.
Figure 6-10
82
6 PTZ Camera
6.5 Connecting the Camera
2
3
1
4
2
Figure 6-11
1.
Use a standard network cable to connect the camera to your network.
2.
Optionally connect a speaker and an external microphone.
3.
Connect power using one of the following methods:


plugging the supplied power adapter to the power port.
using the Power over Ethernet (PoE) function to provide power
over the network cable.
4.
Optionally connect to an input / output device. For details, see 6.7 I/O
Terminal Block.
5.
The status LED of the camera will be on.
6.
Access the camera See 11.1. Accessing the Live View.
83
6.6 Focus Adjustment
On initial installation, it is advised that you adjust the focus for image clarity.
Print out the diagram of radiating lines included on Software CD and hang
up the diagram at the surveillance area. Use the Zoom In / Out and Focus
In / Out buttons on the PTZ control panel from the Web interface (No.4 and
5, Figure 6-15) and adjust the PTZ Camera until it displays clear radiating
lines as shown in picture on the left.
Good focus
Poor focus
Figure 6-12
To access live view for the first time or to assign an IP address, see 11.1
Accessing the Live View.
84
6 PTZ Camera
6.7 I/O Terminal Block
The 3-pin terminal block, located on the back panel of the PTZ Camera,
provides the interface to one digital input and one digital output. The I/O
terminal block can be used for applications such as motion detection, event
alerts via E-Mail and FTP, and center monitoring through Center V2 and
VSM.
6.7.1 Pin Assignment
The pin assignment for the terminal block:
Pin
Figure 6-13
Function
1
Output
2
GND
3
Input
For details on how to enable an installed I/O device, see 13.2 I/O Settings.
85
6.7.2 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional)
The camera can only drive a maximum load of 200mA 5V DC. Connect the
camera to a GV-Relay V2 module (optional product) to expand the
maximum voltage load. See a comparison on maximum voltage loads with
and without GV-Relay below:
Model
GV-PTZ010D
Maximum Voltage Load
Without GV-Relay V2
With GV-Relay V2
200mA 5V DC
10A 250V AC,
10A 125V AC,
5A 100V DC
To connect the GV-Relay V2 module to the PTZ Camera, refer to the figure
and table below.
Figure 6-14
GV-Relay V2
COM
DO1
86
I/O Wires
Pin 2 (Ground)
Pin 1 (Output)
6 PTZ Camera
6.8 PTZ Control
After you have installed the PTZ Camera on network and accessed the
camera’s Web interface you are ready to configure the PTZ Camera.
To see how to install the PTZ Camera on network, see Getting Started,
Chapter 11. To see how to access to live image, see 12.1 Accessing Your
Surveillance Images.
6.8.1 The PTZ Control Panel
The control panel allows users to adjust focus, image quality and configure
camera movements. On the main page, click the PTZ Control button
(No. 9, Figure 12-3) and select PTZ Control Panel. The PTZ control panel
appears.
Figure 6-15
87
Buttons on the PTZ control panel:
No.
1
Name
Exit
Description
Closes the PTZ control panel.
Moves the PTZ Camera to 8 directions:
2
Pan / Tilt Control
up, down, left, right, left up, left down, right
up and right down.
Brings the camera view back to the home
3
Home
point where the camera faces front at a 90
degree angle to the base of the device.
Shortens (zoom in) or lengthens (zoom
4
Zoom In / Out
out) the apparent distance between the
camera and the view.
5
Focus In / Out
Adjusts the sharpness of the camera view.
Brings up these functions: Auto focus,
PTZ speed, maximum number of preset
points, image quality, Preset point,
Sequence, Auto Pan, digital zoom and
default loading.
6
Option
See 6.8.2 Automatic Focus,
6.8.3 PTZ Camera Settings,
6.8.4 Image Settings,
6.8.5 Preset Settings,
6.8.6 Sequence Settings,
6.8.7Auto Pan Settings,
6.8.8 System Configuration.
7
88
Show Preset
Opens and closes the number pad. For
details, see 6.8.5 Preset Settings.
6 PTZ Camera
6.8.2 Automatic Focus
When the camera view is fuzzy, you may use the auto focus feature to
obtain a sharper view. On the PTZ control panel, click the Option button
(No. 6, Figure 6-15) and select AF for automatic focus.
6.8.3 PTZ Camera Settings
Accessing the PTZ Camera Settings
To access PTZ camera settings, click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 615) on the PTZ control panel and select Setup. The setup dialog box
appears.
Figure 6-16
89

PT Speed: Determines the panning (horizontal movement) and tilting
(vertical movement) speed when using the Pan / Tilt Control buttons
on the PTZ control panel. The drop-down list contains 5 speed
settings: 1 is the slowest and 5 the fastest.

Zoom Speed: Determines the zooming speed. The drop-down list
contains 4 speed settings: 1 is the slowest and 4 the fastest.

Max. Preset: Determines the maximum number of Preset points
allowed to be configured and accessed. The number of Preset points
ranges from 16 to 256.
Accessing the VISCA OSD Configuration
The VISCA OSD Configuration contains three groups of settings: image
settings, PTZ settings and system configuration. To access these settings,
click the Option button (No.6, Figure 6-15), select Setup and click Open.
The dialog box appears. Alternatively, you can click Digital I / O and PTZ
on the Web interface and select PTZ Setting.
Figure 6-17
90
6 PTZ Camera
6.8.4 Image Settings
Image Setting provides features on iris control, white balance, image
orientation and other image processing tools to generate clearer images.
To access these features, open the VISCA OSD Configuration dialog box
and select Image Setting.
[Iris] adjusts the amount of exposure.

ALC: Automatic Light Control (ALC) is used to adjust light levels.
 Auto: The amount of exposure is automatically adjusted. Select
Auto to enable this option. If the adjusted image is still too dark or
bright, move the slider. A higher value makes the image brighter.
 Fixed: The amount of exposure is controlled by different aperture
size. Use the slider to select from 0 to 8. A higher value signifies a
bigger aperture and therefore makes the image brighter.

AES: Automatic Electronic Shutter (AES) adjusts the amount of
exposure by different shutter speeds.
 Auto: The shutter speed is automatically adjusted. To enable this
option, select Auto. If the adjusted image is still too dim or bright,
use the slider to select from 0 to 8. A higher value indicates a
slower shutter speed and therefore produces brighter image.
 Fixed: The shutter speed for each level is fixed. Use the slider to
select from 0 to 8. A higher value indicates a faster shutter speed
and therefore produces a dimmer image.
[White Balance] Adjusts the color intensity to make the images normal to
the human eye.

ATW: Auto Tracking White Balance (ATW) automatically adjusts the
color intensity for scenes with changing light source. Use the slider to
select from 0 to 8. A higher value produces a brighter image and a
lower value produces a more yellowish image.
91

AWB: Automatic White Balance (AWB) automatically compensates
for colors under different light levels. AWB is ideal for scenes with a
fixed light source. Use the slider to select from 0 to 8. A higher value
produces a brighter image and a lower value produces a dimmer
image.

R Gain: Adjusts the red element of the live view. Use the slider to
select from 0 to 8. A higher value indicates a stronger degree of red.

B Gain: Adjusts the blue element of the live view. Use the slider to
select from 0 to 8. A higher value indicates a stronger degree of blue.
[Image Reverse]

Positive/Negative: With the Positive mode, the colors in the live view
appear as it is through the eye. With the negative mode, colors in live
view are changed to their complementary colors (opposite colors), i.e.
black will be changed to white, red to green etc. Use the drop-down
list to select between Positive and Negative mode.

H Reverse: Reverses the view horizontally. Use the drop-down list to
select On or Off.

V Reverse: Reverses the view vertically. Use the drop-down list to
select On or Off.
[Other]

BLC: Backlight Compensation (BLC) is used to compensate AGC in
adjusting color intensity. For scenes with strong light in the
background and dim light in the foreground, AGC is not effective
because AGC averages the light intensity of a whole frame. BLC
compensates for this characteristic by restricting AGC to adjust color
intensity of a specific area. To turn on, use the drop-down list, select
On, and select a level among 0 to 7. A higher value indicates a
stronger compensation effect.
92
6 PTZ Camera

AGC
 Freeze: Instantly freezes the live view image when On is selected.
 AGC: Automatic Gain Control (AGC) utilizes an electronic circuit
which amplifies video signal when the signal strength falls below a
given value due to lack of the light on the camera. Adjust camera
sensitivity to provide clear images. Under strong light intensity,
AGC decreases the camera sensitivity to produce dimmer images.
Under weak light intensity, AGC increases the camera sensitivity
to produce brighter images. To adjust AGC, use the slider to select
among 0 to 8. A higher value produces brighter images.
 Sense Up: Use the slider to select among 0 to 8. A higher value
produces brighter images.

APC: Aperture Compensation (APC) is used to adjust the sharpness
of the image.
 H Gain: Sharpens the horizontal elements of the image. Use the
slider to adjust the horizontal compensation between 0 and 12.
 V Gain: Sharpens the vertical elements of the image. User the
slider to adjust the vertical compensation between 0 and 12.

Gamma: Adjusts the contrast of the image. Use the drop-down list to
select between 1 and 2. The “2” option produces stronger contrast.
93
6.8.5 Preset Settings
For PTZ Camera to automatically move toward a point in live view,
establish a Preset. A Preset is a point in live view that can be configured
and saved for future use. The PTZ Camera allows up to 256 Preset points.
For details on the maximum number of Preset points, see 6.8.3 PTZ
Camera Settings.
Configuring a Preset Point
To configure a Preset point:
1
Use one of the Pan / Tilt Control buttons (No. 2, Figure 6-15) to
move the camera to a desired point in live view.
2
To save this Preset point, click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15),
select Preset Set and select the desired Preset number
3
A confirmation message appears. Click Yes.
4
To configure more Preset points, repeat steps 1 to 3 and select a
different Preset number to save.
94
6 PTZ Camera
Renaming a Preset Point
To rename a Preset point:
1
Click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15), select Preset Set and
select Naming. The dialog box appears.
Figure 6-18
2
Click the Preset point you wish to rename and type the new name in
the blank at the top.
3
Click
and click OK to save.
95
Starting and Stopping a Preset Point
To start a Preset movement, click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15),
select Preset Go, and select a Preset number which has been set
previously.
Alternatively, you may use the number pad on the PTZ control panel to
enable a Preset movement:
1
Click the Show Preset button (No. 7, Figure 6-15) to open the
number pad.
2
Click the number of Preset point.
3
Click
to start.
To stop a Preset movement, click the Home button (No. 3, Figure 6-15) or
click one of the Pan / Tilt Control button (No. 2, Figure 6-15).
96
6 PTZ Camera
6.8.6 Sequence Settings
For PTZ Camera to automatically perform a series of movements, you can
configure a Sequence. A Sequence links up more than two Preset points to
form a sequence of movements. Up to 8 Sequences can be created.
Configuring a Sequence
1
After you have configured the Preset points you wish the camera to
follow (for details, see 6.8.5 Preset Settings), you are ready to
configure a Sequence.
2
Open the VISCA OSD Configuration dialog box and select Sequence.
3
Use the Index drop-down list to select the Sequence number you
4
Use the Point drop-down list to select the number of Preset points to
Figure 6-19
wish to configure. Up to 8 Indexes can be created.
be included in the Sequence. A Sequence can contain up to 32
Preset points.
97
5
Use the Preset drop-down list to select the Preset points for the
Sequence.
6
Use the Dwell Time drop-down list to select the staying time that the
camera stays at the Preset point. The dwell time ranges from 0 to 127
seconds at an interval of 0.5 second.
7
Use the Speed drop-down list to select the speed at which the
8
To configure another Sequence, repeat steps 3 to 8 and select a
camera moves toward the Preset point.
different Index number.
9
Click Save to complete the settings.
Starting and Stopping a Sequence
To start a Sequence, click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15 select
Auto and select a Go Sequence number which you have set previously.
To stop a Sequence, click on a Pan / Tilt Control button (No. 2, Figure 615) or the Home button (No. 3, Figure 6-15).
98
6 PTZ Camera
6.8.7 Auto Pan Settings
For the PTZ Camera to survey a horizontal view, establish an Auto Pan.
Up to 4 sets of Auto Pan can be created.
Configuring an Auto Pan
To configure a horizontal movement:
1
Adjust the angle of the camera view using the Up and Down
Control buttons since any vertical movements of the camera will not
be recorded by Auto Pan.
2
On the control panel, click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15),
select Auto and select a Set Auto Pan number.
3
Click the Right or the Left Control buttons on the PTZ control panel
to perform the desired movement.
4
Click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15), select Auto and select
an End Auto Pan number to save this configuration.
99
Configuring the Speed of Auto Pan
You can configure the speed for each set of Auto Pan differently:
1
Open the VISCA OSD Configuration dialog box and select Advance.
Figure 6-20
2
Select the Auto Pan number you wish to configure and select the
3
To configure the speed of another Auto Pan, repeat step 2.
4
Click OK.
Speed.
100
6 PTZ Camera
Starting and Stopping Autopan
To start an Auto Pan, click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15), select
Auto and select a desired Auto Pan number. The PTZ Camera will first
return to the starting position of the selected Auto Pan and proceeds with
the selected Auto Pan movement.
To stop Auto Pan, click the Option button (No. 6, Figure 6-15), select Auto
and select Autopan Stop. Alternatively click on a Pan / Tilt Control button
(No. 2, Figure 6-15) or the Home button (No. 3, Figure 6-15).
Rebooting the Camera
When the system crushes and fails to respond to the PTZ control panel,
reboot the camera.
1
Open the VISCA OSD Configuration dialog box.
2
Click the Motor Reset button to reboot.
3
Wait until the camera has panned and tilted its full range and
returned to the home point.
101
6.8.8 System Configuration
To configure lens settings, open the VISCA OSD Configuration dialog box
and select System Configure.
Figure 6-21

Zoom + AF: Automatically focuses after zooming. It is advised to use
this feature with a zooming distance of at least 1 meter.

Digital Zoom: Allows up to 10x Digital Zoom. This function is enabled
after the Optical Zoom level is fully reached Use the drop-down list to
select among off, 2x, 4x, 6x, 8x and 10x.

Load Camera Default: Loads the factory default setting of Iris, White
Balance, Image Reverse and Other in the VISCA OSD Configuration
dialog box (Figure 6-17).
102
Chapter 7 PT Camera
The GV-PT110D camera is a ceiling-mount device that features panning
and tilting functions. The GV-PT110D is designed to monitor a wide area
and to focus on a selected point on live view when suspicious events occur.
7.1 Packing List

GV-PT1100D

Mounting Base

Mounting Cover

Wall Mount Bracket

Screw Anchor x 3

Long Screw x 3

Short Screw x 3

Round Screw x 3

DC 12V Power Adapter


GV-PT110D Software CD

Washer x 3
GV-PTZ110D / GV-PTZ010D
Quick Start Guide

104
GV-NVR Software DVD

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
7
PT Camera
7.2 Features

1.3 megapixel progressive scan CMOS

Dual streams from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG

Up to 15 fps at 1280 x 1024

Day and night function (with removable IR-cut filter)

Pan and tilt (Pan: -175° ~ 175°; Tilt: -45° ~ 90°)

Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot

Two-way audio

One sensor input and alarm output

Input-triggered Preset points

Motion detection

Privacy mask

IP address filtering

DC 12 V / AC 24 V / PoE

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
105
7.3 Overview
Figure 7-1
No.
1
Name
Description
DC 12V / AC 24V
Connects to a DV 12V or AC 24V Power
Terminal Block
Adapter.
2
LAN / PoE
Connects to a 10/100 Ethernet or PoE.
3
I/O Terminal Block
For details, see 7.7 I/O Terminal Block.
4
Memory Card Slot
5
Audio Out
Connects a speaker for audio output.
6
Audio In
Connects a microphone for audio input.
106
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
7
No.
Name
PT Camera
Description
Turns green when the system operates
7
Status LED
normally and turns off when system error
occurs.
8
Power LED
9
Focus Ring
Turns green when the power is on and
turns off when the power is off.
Manually rotates this ring left or right to
adjust focus.
Turns on to automatically illuminate a
10
IR
surveillance area by infrared light to
11
Microphone
Records the sounds.
12
Default
produce clearer images during the night.
Resets to system default settings. For
details, see 15.3 Restoring to Factory
Default Settings.
107
7.4 Installation
For installation procedures of the GV-PT110D, see 6.4 Installation.
7.5 Connecting the Camera
For procedures of connecting the GV-PT110D, see 6.5 Connecting the
Camera.
7.6 Focus Adjustment
After you have followed 5.5 Connecting the Camera and connected all the
necessary cables and wires, follow the steps below to adjust image clarity.
1.
Access the live view. For details, see 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
2.
Adjust image clarity using the GV-IP Device Utility program. For
details, see 11.2 Adjusting Image Clarity.
108
7
PT Camera
7.7 I/O Terminal Block
The 3-pin terminal block, located on the back panel of the PT Camera,
provides the interface to one digital input and one digital output. The I/O
terminal block can be used for applications such as motion detection, event
alerts via E-Mail and FTP, and center monitoring through Center V2 and
VSM.
7.7.1 Pin Assignment
The pin assignment for the terminal block:
Pin
123
Figure 7-2
Function
1
Output
2
GND
3
Input
For details on how to enable an installed I/O device, see 13.2 I/O Settings.
7.7.2 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional)
You can install a GV-Relay V2 to expand the maximum voltage load of
your GV-PT110D. For details, see 7.7.2 Voltage Load Expansion.
109
7.8 PT Control
The GV-PT110D shares similar user interfaces and features with the GVPTZ010D camera. The supported functions are listed in the table below.
Supported Function
Description
PT Control Panel
The following buttons on the PT control panel
are available: Exit, Pan / Tilt Control, Home,
Option and Show Preset. For details on these
functions, see 6.8.1 The PTZ Control Panel.
PT Camera Settings
Contains settings on PT speed and the
maximum number of preset points. For details,
see Accessing the PTZ Camera Settings in
6.8.3 PTZ Camera Settings.
Preset point
A Preset point is a point in live view that can
be configured and saved for future use. For
details, see 6.8.5 Preset Settings.
110
7
Supported Function
Sequence
PT Camera
Description
A Sequence consists of a series of Preset
points. Configure a Sequence to direct the
camera to perform s series of movements. For
details, see 6.8.6 Sequence Settings.
Auto Pan
The camera can be configured to monitor the
surveillance area in a horizontal movement.
For details, see 6.8.7 Auto Pan Settings.
111
Chapter 8 Vandal Proof IP Dome
The Vandal Proof IP Domes are designed for outdoor usage. They are
equipped with automatic infrared cut filters for day and night surveillance.
Model options range from 1.3. to 3 megapixels:
Model No.
Specification
Description
GV-VD120D
Megapixel,
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD121D
Auto Iris,
1.3 MP,
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
Varifocal
f:2.7 ~ 9 mm,
H.264, Low
GV-VD122D
Lens
F/1.3, 1/3”
Lux, Vandal
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
ø 14 mm lens
Proof IP Dome
GV-VD123D
mount
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD220D
Megapixel,
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD221D
Auto Iris,
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
Varifocal
f:2.7 ~ 9 mm,
GV-VD222D
Lens
F/1.3, 1/3”
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
ø 14 mm lens
GV-VD223D
mount
2 MP, H.264,
Vandal Proof
IP Dome
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
GV-VD320D
Megapixel,
(IK10+, Transparent Cover)
GV-VD321D
Auto Iris,
(IK10+, Smoked Cover)
Varifocal
f:2.7 ~ 9 mm,
GV-VD322D
Lens
F/1.3, 1/3”
(IK7, Transparent Cover)
ø 14 mm lens
GV-VD323D
mount
(IK7, Smoked Cover)
3 MP, H.264,
Vandal Proof
IP Dome
8
Vandal Proof IP Dome
8.1 Packing List

Vandal Proof IP Dome

Silica Gel Bag x 2

Screw Anchor x 4

Torx Wrench x 1

Ceiling Screw x 4

Blue Screw x 3

T-Cap Screw x 3

Small Screw Cap x 3

T-Cap x 3

Plastic Clip x 3

Focus Adjustment Cap

DC 12V Power Adapter

3-Pin Terminal Block

GV-IPCam H.264 Software CD
GV-IPCam H.264 Quick

GV-NVR Software DVD

Start Guide

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
Note: Focus Adjustment Cap is only needed and supplied for IK10+
models (GV-VD120D, 121D, 220D, 221D, 320D and 321D).
113
8.2 Features

1/3’’ progressive scan CMOS for GV-VD120D
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS for GV-VD220D / 320D

Dual video streams. Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG; stream 2 from
H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG

Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 1024 for GV-VD120D
Up to 30 fps at 1920 x 1080 for GV-VD220D
Up to 20 fps at 2048 x 1536 for GV-VD320D

Day and night function (with removable IR-cut filter)

Intelligent IR

IK10+ Vandal Proof (for GV-VD120D / 121D / 220D / 221D / 320D /
321D only)

IP66 rating

3-axis mechanism (pan / tilt / roll)

Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot

Two-way audio

One sensor input and alarm output

TV-out support

Motion detection

Tampering alarm

Visual automation

Text overlay

Privacy mask

IP address filtering

DC 12V / AC 24V / PoE

Megapixel lens

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
114
8
Vandal Proof IP Dome
8.3 Overview
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 8-1
No.
Name
Description
1
Power LED
Turns on (green) when the power is on
and turns off when there is no power
supply.
2
Status LED
Turns on (green) when the system
operates normally and turns off when
system error occurs.
3
Default Button
Resets to factory default. For details, see
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default Settings.
4
Memory Card Slot
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
5
6
Thread Lock
Locks the housing cover to the camera
body to prevent the cover from falling.
Pan Disc
Loosens to pan the camera.
7
Tilt Screw
Loosen the screw to tilt the camera.
8
Rotational Screw
Loosens to adjust the camera angle.
9
Zoom Screw
Adjusts the zoom of the camera.
10
Focus Screw
Adjusts the focus of the camera.
11
Silica Gel Bag
Absorbs moisture in the camera body.
115
8.4 Installation
The Vandal Proof IP Dome is designed for outdoors. With the standard
packing, there are two ways to install the Vandal Proof IP Dome: hardceiling mount and in-ceiling mount.
8.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount
Figure 8-2
1.
Unpack the camera package and take out the camera body.
Unscrew the
housing cover
116
8
Vandal Proof IP Dome
Unscrew thread
lock
Unscrew the inner
housing
Take out the
camera body
117
2.
Mark the position of four screw holes on the desired installation
location, and drill holes in the marked locations. Drill the ellipse part if
you wish to put the wires through it.
Figure 8-3
3.
Insert the screw anchors to the 4 holes on the ceiling.
4.
Secure the back cover to the ceiling with 4 ceiling screws.
Figure 8-4
5.
6.
Refer to step 1 to secure the camera body with inner housing.
Thread the cable through the conduit entry at the side of the back
cover. Alternatively pass the wires through the ellipse hole at the
bottom of the back cover.
118
8
7.
Vandal Proof IP Dome
Connect the network, power and other cables to the camera. See 8.5
Connecting the Camera.
8.
9.
Access the live view. See 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
Based on the live view, adjust the camera to a desired angle as
illustrated below.
Tip: The 3-axis mechanism offers flexible and easy installation.
Pan Adjustment
Figure 8-5
Tilt Adjustment
Figure 8-6
119
Rotational Adjustment
Figure 8-7
10. Adjust image clarity using the GV-IP Device Utility program. For
details, see 11.2 Adjusting Image Clarity.
11. Screw on the thread lock as shown in step 1.
12. Replace the silica gel bag on the camera body within 2 minutes of
opening the silica gel bag package.
13. Secure the housing cover to the camera body as shown in step 1.
Note: Adjust the black mask inside the housing cover to make sure the
camera view is not obscured.
Important:
1.
To prevent the lens from fogging up, you must replace the silica
gel bag every time you open the camera. The gel bag loses its
effectiveness when the dry camera is opened.
2.
Make sure the housing cover is properly secured to prevent water
from entering and damaging the inner housing.
120
8
Vandal Proof IP Dome
8.4.2 In-Ceiling Mount
Figure 8-8
1.
Follow step 1 in 8.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount section to remove the
housing cover, thread lock and back cover, and take out the camera
body.
2.
Cut out a circle with a diameter of 142 mm on the ceiling.
3.
Insert a blue screw to the indicated holes on the camera body.
Figure 8-9
121
4.
Screw in a plastic clip to the blue screw, hold it with one hand and use
a screw driver to rotate the blue screw until the plastic clip moves half
way down.
Figure 8-10
5.
Secure a T-cap on top of the blue screw with a small screw cap and a
T-cap screw. Do not tighten the small screw cap so that the plastic
clip can move down freely.
Figure 8-11
6.
122
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two blue screws.
8
7.
Vandal Proof IP Dome
Insert the camera to the ceiling with the plastic screws moved inward.
Figure 8-12
8.
Move the blue screws out and rotate the blue screw with a screw
driver until the plastic clip and the bottom of the camera body clamps
the ceiling tightly.
Figure 8-13
9.
Connect the network, power and other cables to the camera. See 8.5
Connecting the Camera.
10. Access the live view. See 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
11. Follow steps 9 to 10 in 8.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount section to adjust the
angle, focus and zoom of the camera.
12. Follow steps 11 to 13 in 8.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount section to secure
the thread lock, replace the silica gel bag and secure the housing
cover.
123
8.5 Connecting the Camera
Connect your Vandal Proof IP Dome to power, network and other cables
needed.
8.5.1 Wire Definition
The cables of Vandal Proof IP Dome are illustrated and defined below.
Figure 8-14
No.
Wire Color
Definition
1
Black (thick)
Shielding Ground
2
Black (thin)
DC 12V+ / AC 24V+
3
Red
DC 12V- / AC 24V-
4
Orange
Digital In
5
Brown
Digital out
6
Yellow
Ground
7
Red RCA
Audio in
8
Green RCA
Audio out
9
Black BNC
TV out
Note: To use the TV out function, connect the black BNC connector to a
monitor and select your signal format (NTSC or PAL) at the TV Out field
on the Web interface. For details, see 13.1.1 Video Settings.
124
8
Vandal Proof IP Dome
8.5.2 Power Connection
There are two ways to supply power to the camera:

Use a Power over Ethernet (PoE) adapter to connect the camera to the
network, and the power will be provided at the same time.

Use the supplied 3-pin Terminal Block and power adapter. Follow the
steps below to connect the Terminal Block and the power adapter.
1.
Insert the thin black wire of the Vandal Proof IP Dome to the left-side
pin of the 3-Pin Terminal Block and the red wire to the right-side pin.
Figure 8-15
2.
Connect the DC 12V Power Adapter to the 3-Pin Terminal Block.
Figure 8-16
125
8.5.3 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional)
The camera can only drive a maximum load of 200mA 5V DC. Connect the
camera to a GV-Relay V2 module (optional product) to expand the
maximum voltage load. See a comparison on maximum voltage loads with
and without GV-Relay:
Maximum Voltage Load
Models
Without GV-Relay V2
GV-Vandal Proof
IP Dome
With GV-Relay V2
10A 250V AC,
200mA 5V DC
10A 125V AC,
5A 100V DC
To connect the GV-Relay V2 module to the Vandal Proof IP Dome, refer to
the figure and table below.
Figure 8-17
GV-Relay V2
Bullet Camera
COM
Ground (Yellow)
DO1
Digital Out (Brown)
126
Chapter 9 Fixed IP Dome
The Fixed IP Dome is an indoor device designed with 3-axis mechanism
for easy and flexible installation. The Fixed IP Dome also features IR LED
for infrared illumination during low light conditions. Three models are
available:
Model No.
Specification
Description
1.3 MP, H.264, Low
GV-FD120D
Lux, Fixed IP Dome
Megapixel, Auto Iris,
GV-FD220D
Varifocal
f:2.7 ~ 9 mm,
2 MP, H.264,
Lens
F/1.3, 1/3”
Fixed IP Dome
ø 14 mm lens mount
GV-FD320D
3 MP, H.264,
Fixed IP Dome
9.1 Packing List
9.1.1 Packing List for Hard-Ceiling Mount

Fixed IP Dome

Torx Wrench x 1

Mounting Plate x 1

Short Screw Anchor x 3

Ceiling Screw x 3

Plate Screw x 3

TV-out Wire

DC 12V Power Adapter

Sticker

GV-IPCAM H.264 Quick Start
Guide

GV-IPCam H.264 Software
CD

128
GV-NVR Software DVD

GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
9 Fixed IP Dome
9.1.2 Packing List for In-Ceiling Mount

In-Ceiling Housing Cover

Mounting Plate x 1

Mounting Bracket x 3

Copper Pillar x 3

Copper Pillar Screw x 6

Bracket Screw x 3

Thread Lock Screw x 1

Housing Cover Thread

Sticker (In-Ceiling Mount)
129
9.2 Features

1/3’’ progressive scan CMOS for GV-FD120D
1/2.5” progressive scan CMOS for GV-FD220D / 320D

Dual video streams. Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG; stream 2 from
H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG

Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 1024 for GV-FD120D
Up to 30 fps at 1920 x 1080 for GV-FD220D
Up to 20 fps at 2048 x 1536 for GV-FD320D

Day and night function (with removable IR-cut filter)

3-axis mechanism (pan / tilt / roll)

Built-in IR LED

Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot

Two-way audio

One sensor input and alarm output

TV-out support

Motion detection

Tampering alarm

Visual automation

Text overlay

Privacy mask

IP address filtering

DC 12V / AC 24V / PoE

Megapixel lens

Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP

28 languages on Web interface
130
9 Fixed IP Dome
9.3 Overview
Figure 9-1
No.
1
Name
Description
Focus Screw
Adjusts the focus of the camera.
2
Zoom Screw
Adjusts the zoom of the camera.
3
Rotational Screw
Loosens to adjust the camera angle.
4
Tilt Screw
Loosens the screw to tilt the camera.
5
Pan Disc
Loosens to pan the camera.
6
Video Out
Connects to a portable monitor for setting
the focus and angle of Fixed IP Dome
during initial installation.
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
7
Memory Card Slot
8
Default Button
15.3. Restoring to Factory Default
9
Audio In
Connects a microphone for audio input.
10
Audio Out
Connects a speaker for audio output.
11
LAN / PoE
Connects to a 10/100 Ethernet or PoE.
recording data.
Resets to factory default. For details, see
Settings.
131
No.
Name
12
I/O Terminal Block
13
DC 12V Port
14
Status LED
Description
Connects I/O devices. For details, see 9.6
I/O Terminal Block.
Connects to power.
Turns on (green) when the system
operates normally and turns off when
system error occurs.
15
Power LED
Turns on (green) when the power is on
and turns off when there is no power
supply.
132
9 Fixed IP Dome
9.4 Installation
The Fixed IP Dome is designed for indoors. With the standard packing,
there are three ways to install the Fixed IP Dome: hard-ceiling mount, inceiling mount and wall-surface mount.
9.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount
Figure 9-2
1.
Paste the supplied sticker onto a desired location on the ceiling. Drill
the three red dots and the ellipse mark only if you wish to run the
wires into the ceiling.
2.
Unpack the camera package and take out the camera body.
Use the torx
wrench to loosen
the housing cover
at the front and the
back
Figure 9-3
133
Take out the
camera body
Figure 9-4
3.
Secure the camera body to the mounting plate with three ceiling
screws.
Figure 9-5
4.
Connect the network, power and other cables to the camera. See 9.5
Connecting the Camera.
5.
134
Access the live view. See 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
9 Fixed IP Dome
6.
Based on the live view, adjust the camera to a desired angle as
illustrated below.
Tip: The 3-axis mechanism offers flexible and easy ceiling / wall
installation.
Pan Adjustment
Figure 9-6
Tilt Adjustment
Figure 9-7
135
Rotational Adjustment
Figure 9-8
7.
Adjust image clarity using the GV-IP Device Utility program. For
details, see 11.2 Adjusting Image Clarity.
8.
Secure the housing cover as shown in step 2. Remove the indicated
part when necessary.
Figure 9-9
Note: Adjust the black mask inside the housing cover to make sure the
camera view is not obscured.
136
9 Fixed IP Dome
9.4.2 In-Ceiling Mount
Figure 9-10
1.
Follow step 2 in the 9.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount to remove the housing
cover and take out the camera body.
2.
Paste the supplied sticker onto a desired location on the ceiling and
cut a circle on the ceiling along the edge of the sticker.
3.
On the mounting plate, locate the 3 holes labeled as 1 and insert the
3 copper pillars from the back side.
Figure 9-11
137
4.
From the side with the numbering, secure the copper pillars with 3
copper pillar screws.
Figure 9-12
5.
Place the 3 mounting brackets at the indent next to the copper pillars
(labeled as 2 on the mounting plate) and secure them using the 3
bracket screws.
Figure 9-13
138
9 Fixed IP Dome
6.
Place the mounting plate on the camera body with the copper pillars
inserted in the locations indicated below. The arrow on the mounting
plate should be pointing toward the front of the camera.
Figure 9-14
7.
From the bottom of the camera, secure the copper pillars using the 3
copper pillars screws.
8.
Place the camera into the ceiling opening.
9.
On the back side, make sure the black plastic clips are slightly above
the ceiling board and pointing outward.
Back Side
Front Side
Figure 9-15
10. Tighten the bracket screws from the front side of the camera.
11. Connect the network, power and other cables to the camera. See 9.5
Connecting the Camera.
139
12. Access the live view. See 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
13. Follow steps 6 and 7 in 9.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount section to adjust the
angle, focus and zoom of the camera.
14. Use the housing cover thread and the thread lock screw to attach the
housing cover to the camera body.
Figure 9-16
15. Place the housing cover on the camera body with the GeoVision logo
pointing toward the front of the camera.
Figure 9-17
140
9 Fixed IP Dome
9.4.3 Wall-Surface Mount
Figure 9-18
1.
Follow step 2 in 9.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount section to remove the
housing cover and take out the camera body.
2.
Paste the supplied sticker onto a desired location on the wall. Drill the
three red dots, and the ellipse mark only if you wish to run the wires
into the wall.
3.
Insert the short screw anchors and secure the camera and the
mounting plate with three plate screws.
Figure 9-19
4.
Connect the network, power and other cables to the camera. See 9.5
Connecting the Camera.
141
5.
Access the live view. See 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
6.
Follow steps 6 and 7 in 9.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount section to adjust the
angle, focus and zoom of the camera.
7.
Follow step 8 in 9.4.1 Hard-Ceiling Mount section to secure the
housing cover.
142
9 Fixed IP Dome
9.5 Connecting the Camera
5
33
2
2
1
4
Figure 9-20
1.
Use a standard network cable to connect the camera to your network.
2.
Optionally connect a speaker and an external microphone.
3.
Optionally connect a monitor using a Video Out wire. Enable this
function by selecting your signal format at the TV Out field on the
Web interface. See 13.1.1 Video Settings.
4.
5.
6.
Optionally connect to input / output devices. For details, see 9.6 I/O
Terminal Block.
Connect power using one of the following methods:


plugging the supplied power adapter to power port.
using the Power over Ethernet (PoE) function and the power will
be provided over the network cable.
The status LED of the camera will be on.
143
9.6 I/O Terminal Block
The terminal block, located on the back panel of the Fixed IP Dome,
provides the interface to one input and one output devices. The I/O
terminal block can be used for applications such as motion detection, event
alerts via E-Mail and FTP, and center monitoring through Center V2 and
VSM.
9.6.1 Pin Assignment
The Fixed IP Dome supports one digital input and one digital output of dry
contact.
Pin
Figure 9-21
144
Function
1
Digital Output
2
GND
3
Digital Input
9 Fixed IP Dome
9.6.2 Voltage Load Expansion (Optional)
The camera can only drive a maximum load of 200mA 5V DC. Connect the
camera to a GV-Relay V2 module (optional product) to expand the
maximum voltage load. See a comparison on maximum voltage loads with
and without GV-Relay below:
Models
GV-FD120D
GV-FD220D
Maximum Voltage Load
Without GV-Relay V2
200mA 5V DC
GV-FD320D
With GV-Relay V2
10A 250V AC,
10A 125V AC,
5A 100V DC
To connect the GV-Relay V2 module to the Fixed IP Dome, refer to the
figure and table below.
Figure 9-22
GV-Relay V2
Bullet Camera
COM
Pin 2 (GND)
DO1
Pin 1 (Digital Output)
145
Chapter 10 Cube & Wireless
Camera
The Cube Camera is a light weighted wired / wireless network camera
designed for indoor usage. Its simple design allows for fast and easy
installation and fixed-spot surveillance once installed. Four models are
available:
Model No.
Specification
1.3 MP, H.264,
GV-CB120
Cube Camera
2 MP, H.264, Cube
GV-CB220
GV-CBW120
Description
Megapixel, Fixed
Camera
Fixed
Iris, f: 3.35 mm,
1.3 MP, H.264,
Lens
F/2.4, 1/3” M12 mm
Wireless Cube
lens mount
Camera
2 MP, H.264,
GV-CBW220
Wireless Cube
Camera
10 Cube & Wireless Camera
10.1 Packing List
•
Cube Camera
•
Supporting Rack
•
Screw x 3
•
Screw Anchor x 3
DC 5V or DC 12V Power
•
DC 5V Power Adapter
•
Adapter
(for GV-CBW120 / 220
(for GV-CB120 / 220)
•
GV-IPCAM H.264 Quick
•
Start Guide
•
GV-NVR Quick Start Guide
GV-IPCam H.264 Software
CD
•
GV-NVR Software DVD
147
10.2 Features
•
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS
•
Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG; stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or
MJPEG
•
Up to 30 fps at 1280 x 1024 for GV-CB120 / CBW120
Up to 30 fps at 1920 x 1080 for GV-CB220 / CBW220
•
Day and night function (electronic)
•
Wireless connectivity: WiFi 802.11b/g/n (for GV-CBW120 / 220 only)
•
Two-way audio
•
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
•
Motion detection
•
Tampering alarm
•
Text overlay
•
Privacy mask
•
IP address filtering
•
Megapixel lens
•
Support for iPhone, iPad, Android and 3GPP
•
28 languages on Web interface
148
10 Cube & Wireless Camera
10.3 Overview
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
10
Figure 10-1
No.
1
Name
Description
Microphone
Receives sounds.
2
Speaker
Plays sounds.
3
LAN
Connects to a 10/100 Ethernet.
4
Status LED
Turns red when the system powers on.
Turns orange when the system is ready.
Turns green when the camera is connected
5
LAN LED
6
Stand screw
7
Default Button
8
Power port
to the Internet through wires. Turns blue
when wireless service is enabled (for GVCBW120 / 220 only).
9
10.
Memory Card Slot
Connects to the Supporting Rack.
Resets to factory default. For details, see
15.3. Restoring to Factory Default Settings.
Connects to the supplied power adapter.
Inserts a micro SD/SDHC card to store
recording data.
Wireless LAN
Indicates that the camera supports wireless
Receiver
connection (for GV-CBW120/220 only).
149
10.4 Installation
Follow the steps below to install, connect to and adjust your Cube Camera
and Wireless Cube Camera.
1.
Put the supporting rack on the desired location and make marks for
screw anchors.
Figure 10-2
2.
Drill the marks and insert the screw anchors.
3.
Secure the supporting rack onto the wall using the supplied screws.
4.
Screw the camera onto the supporting rack and fasten the indicated
screw.
Figure 10-3
150
10 Cube & Wireless Camera
5.
Connect the network and power cables to the camera. See 10.5
Connecting the Camera.
6.
Access the live view. See 11.1 Accessing the Live View.
7.
Adjust the angle of the camera based on live view and fasten the
indicated screw.
Figure 10-4
8.
For GV-CBW120/220, to connect to the Internet through wireless
service, follow the steps in 11.1.3 Configuring the Wireless
Connection.
151
10.5 Connecting the Camera
2
1
Figure 10-5
1.
Use a standard network cable to connect the camera to your network.
2.
Power on using the supplied power adapter.
3.
The status LED of the camera will be orange.
152
Chapter 11 Getting Started
This section provides the initial and basic configurations of the GV-IPCAM
H.264.
11.1 Accessing the Live View
Access or configure your camera according to the camera type and its
firmware version:
Camera Type &
Default Connection Type
Firmware Version

GV-IPCAM H.264 with
firmware V1.07 or later
(except GV-BX110D,
BL110D, GV-MFD110,
GV-PT110D, GVPTZ010D)
DHCP
An unused IP address is automatically
assigned by the DHCP server to the
camera when the camera is connected to
the network. Refer to 11.1.1 Checking
the Dynamic IP Address to look up the
IP address.
However, if the camera is installed in a
LAN without DHCP server, access the
camera by its default IP address
192.168.0.10 and see 11.1.2
Configuring the IP Address for more
detail.
Camera Type &
Default Connection Type
Firmware Version






GV-IPCAM H.264 with
firmware V1.06 or
earlier
GV-BX110D
GV-BL110D
GV-MFD110
GV-PT110D
GV-PTZ010D
Static
The default IP address 192.168.0.10 will
be automatically assigned when the
camera is connected to the network.
To avoid IP conflict with other GeoVision
IP devices, it is advisable to re-assign a
different IP address. See 11.1.2
Configuring the IP Address for more
detail.
154
11 Getting Started
11.1.1 Checking the Dynamic IP Address
Follow the steps below to look up the IP address and access the Web
interface.
1.
Install the GV-IP Device Utility program included on the GV-IPCAM
H.264 Software CD.
Note: The PC installed with GV-IP Device Utility must be under the
same LAN with the GV-IPCAM H.264 you wish to configure.
2.
On the GV-IP Utility window, click the
button to search for the IP
devices connected in the same LAN. Click the Name or Mac Address
column to sort.
Figure 11-1
155
3.
Find the camera with its Mac Address, click on its IP address and
select Web Page.
Figure 11-2
4.
The login page appears.
Figure 11-3
5.
156
Type the default ID and password admin and click Apply to log in.
11 Getting Started
11.1.2 Configuring the IP Address
Follow the steps below to configure the IP address.
1.
Open your web browser, and type the default IP address
http://192.168.0.10.
2.
In both Login and Password fields, type the default value admin. Click
Apply.
3.
In the left menu, select Network and then LAN to begin the network
settings. This page appears.
Figure 11-4
4.
Select Dynamic IP address, Static IP address or PPPoE and type
the required network information.
5.
Click Apply. The camera is now accessible by entering the assigned
IP address on the web browser.
157
Important:
1.
If Dynamic IP Address or PPPoE is enabled, you need to know
which IP address the camera will get from DHCP server or ISP to
log in. If your camera is installed in the LAN, use the GV-IP Device
Utility to look up its current dynamic IP address. See 11.1.1
Checking the Dynamic IP Address. If your camera uses a public
dynamic IP address via PPPoE, use the dynamic DNS Service to
obtain a domain name that is linked to the camera’s changing IP
address first. For details on Dynamic IP Address and PPPoE, see
13.7.1 LAN Configuration and 13.7.3 Advanced TCP/IP.
2.
If Dynamic IP Address or PPPoE is enabled and you cannot
access the camera, you may have to reset it to the factory default
and then perform the network settings again.
To restore the factory settings, see 15.3 Restoring to Factory
Default Settings.
158
11 Getting Started
11.1.3 Configuring the Wireless Connection
For GV-CBW120/220, you may choose to create wireless connection to the
Internet.
1.
To set up the wireless LAN for the first time, power on and connect a
standard network cable to the camera.
2.
An IP address will be automatically assigned to the camera. Use GV
IP Device Utility to search for the device. For details, see 11.1.1
Checking the Dynamic IP Address.
3.
Configure the wireless settings.
A. On the Web interface, select Network, select Wireless and Client
Mode. This dialog box appears.
Figure 11-5
B. Type the Network Name (SSID) or click the Access Point Survey
button to search and select for the available Access
Points/wireless stations.
159
C. Select Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure for the Network type.
D. Select the Authentication Type using the drop-down list. You can
also obtain this information by clicking the Access Point Survey
button.
E. Type the WPA-PSK Pre-shared Key or WEP depending on the
encryption setting for the Access Point.
F. Click Apply to save the configuration.
Note:
1.
Your encryption settings must match those used by the Access Points
or wireless stations with which you want to associate.
2.
3.
When Ad Hoc is used, only WEP encryption is supported.
When you lose the wireless access, you can still access the unit by
connecting it to a LAN and using the GV IP Device Utility to search for
the device.
4.
For detailed information on configuring the wireless LAN, see 13.7.2
Wireless Client Mode.
160
11 Getting Started
4.
Enable wireless LAN.
A. On the Web interface, select Network and LAN. This page
appears.
Figure 11-6
B. Select Wireless for Optional Network Type
C. To use a dynamic IP address assigned by the DHCP server,
select Dynamic IP address. To use a fixed IP address, select
Static IP address and type the IP address information.
5.
Click Apply. The Wireless Cube Camera will start creating a wireless
connection to the access point. The connection is established when
the LAN LED turns blue (No.10, Figure 10-1).
6.
Unplug the Ethernet cable.
161
11.2 Adjusting Image Clarity
Note the procedures described in this section only apply to Box Camera,
IR Arctic Box Camera, GV-MFD110, Bullet Camera, PT Camera, Vandal
Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP Dome. To adjust focus of a PTZ camera,
refer to 6.6 Focus Adjustment; for Mini Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube Camera
and Wireless Cube Camera, refer to Camera Adjustment in 12.2.2 The
Control Panel on the Live View Window.
After you have connected your GV-IPCAM H.264 to the network, follow the
steps below to adjust image clarity.
1.
Make sure you have installed the GV-IP Device Utility program
included on the GV-IPCAM H.264 Software CD.
Note: The PC installed with GV-IP Device Utility must be under the
same LAN with the GV-IPCAM H.264 you wish to configure.
162
11 Getting Started
2.
On the GV-IP Utility window, click the
button to search for the IP
devices connected in the same LAN. Click the IP Address of the
camera you desire. A drop-down list appears.
Figure 11-7
3.
Select Focus Value. The Login dialog box appears.
Figure 11-8
163
4.
Type the user name and password of the camera selected. The
default is admin for both user name and password. This window
appears.
Figure 11-9
5.
For GV-VD120D / 121D, VD-220D / 221D and VD-320D / 321D, hold
the supplied Focus Adjustment Cap over the camera view. For details,
see 11.2.1 Using Focus Adjustment Cap for details.
6.
Adjust the Focus Screw and the Zoom Screw of the camera slowly
until the focus value reaches the maximum. For example, the
maximum focus value in Step 4 is 103. For locations of adjustment
screws in each model, see 11.2.2 Locations of Adjustment Screws.
Note:
1.
Do not over tighten the screws. The screws only need to be as
tight as your fingers can get them to be. Do not bother using any
tool to get them tighter. Doing so can damage the structure of lens.
2.
The maximum focus value may vary when the environment
changes.
164
11 Getting Started
11.2.1 Using Focus Adjustment Cap
There are two types of Focus Adjustment Caps for GV-VD120D / 121D,
VD-220D / 221D and VD-320D / 321D. Hold and close the Focus
Adjustment Cap to the lens in order to simulate the IK10+ housing cover
before installing it.
Focus Adjustment Cap Type I:
Hold the Focus Adjustment
Cap on top of the camera view
and slightly tilt to one side to
adjust the image.
Focus Adjustment Cap Type II :
Hold the Focus Adjustment Cap
on top of the camera view and
keep it close to the camera.
165
Do not leave a distance between
the Focus Adjustment Cap and
the camera.
166
11 Getting Started
11.2.2 Locations of Adjustment Screws
Models
Adjustment Screws
GV-BX110D
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
GV-MFD110
Bullet Camera
167
Models
Adjustment Screws
PT Camera
Vandal Proof IP Dome
Fixed IP Dome
Note: GV-BX110D (fixed lens) and GV-BX130D-1 do not contain a
Zoom Screw.
168
11 Getting Started
11.3 Configuring the Basics
Once the camera is properly installed, the following important features can
be configured using the browser-based configuration page and are
discussed in the following sections in this manual:

Date and time adjustment: see 13.8.1 Date & Time Settings.

Login and privileged passwords: see 13.8.4 User Account.

Network gateway: see 13.7 Network.

Camera image adjustment: see 12.2.2 The Control Panel of the Live

Video format, resolution and frame rate: see 13.1.1 Video Settings.
View Window.
169
Chapter 12 Accessing the Camera
Two types of users are allowed to log on to the GV-IPCAM H.264:
Administrator and Guest. The Administrator has unrestricted access to all
system configurations, while the Guest has the access to live view and
network status only.
12.1 Accessing Your Surveillance Images
Once installed, your GV-IPCAM H.264 is accessible on a network. Follow
these steps to access your surveillance images:
1.
2.
Start your web browser.
Enter the IP address or the domain name of the camera in the
Location/Address field of your browser.
Figure 12-1
3.
Enter the login name and password.

The default login name and password for Administrator are
admin.

The default login name and password for Guest are guest.
12 Accessing the Camera
4.
Click Apply. A video image, similar to the example on Figure 12-2, is
now displayed in your browser.
Note: To enable the updating of images in Internet Explorer, you must
set your browser to allow ActiveX Controls and perform a once-only
installation of GeoVision’s ActiveX component onto your computer.
171
12.2 Functions Featured on the Main Page
This section introduces the features of the Live View window and Network
Status on the main page. The two features are accessible by both
Administrator and Guest.
Main Page of Guest Mode
▼ Video and Motion
► Live View
► Camera
▼ Network
► Status
Figure 12-2
The GV-IPCAM H.264 can process one video stream in two different codec
and image settings. In the Administrator mode, both streams are available.
Click Streaming 1 or Streaming 2 in the left menu to access the live view.
In the Guest mode, only one stream is available, as shown in Figure 12-2.
172
12 Accessing the Camera
12.2.1 The Live View Window
Internet Explorer
When accessing the live view using Internet Explorer, the following window
appears.
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 12-3
No. Name
Function
1
Play
Plays live video.
2
Stop
Stops playing video.
3
Microphone
4
Speaker
Talks to the surveillance area from the local
computer.
Listens to the audio around the camera.
173
No. Name
5
Snapshot
6
File Save
Function
Takes a snapshot of live video.
--- See 12.2.3 Snapshot of Live Video.
Records live video to the local computer.
--- See 12.2.4 Video Recording.
Switches to full screen view. Right-click the
image to have these options: Snapshot, Full
Screen, Resolution, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Wide
Angle Dewarping, PIP, PAP, GPS and Google
7
Full Screen
Maps.
--- See 12.2.5 Wide Angle Dewarping,
12.2.6 Picture-in-Picture and Picture-and-Picture
View for PIP and PAP views,
12.8.2 GPS Maps Settings.
Brings up these functions: Alarm Notify, Video
and Audio Configuration, Remote Config, Show
Camera Name and Image Enhance.
8
Show System
--- See 12.2.7 Alarm Notification,
Menu
12.2.8 Video and Audio Configuration,
12.2.9 Remote Configuration,
12.2.10 Camera Name Display, and
12.2.12. Image Enhancement.
Enables the PTZ Control Panel or the Visual
PTZ.
--- See 5.8.1 The PTZ Control Panel and
9
PTZ Control Panel 12.2.12 Visual PTZ
Note this function is only available in PTZ
Camera and PT Camera.
174
12 Accessing the Camera
No. Name
Function
Enables the I/O Control Panel or the Visual
Automation.
--- See 12.2.13 I/O Control.
10 I/O Control
Note this function is not available in Mini Fixed
Dome, Mini Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube
Camera and Wireless Cube Camera.
Non-IE Browsers
When accessing the live view using Google Chrome, Firefox or Safari, this
window appears. Note the following functions are not supported on non-IE
browsers: Motion Detection, Tampering Alarm, Visual Automation, Text
Overlay, Two-Way Audio and GPS Settings.
Figure 12-4
175
12.2.2 The Control Panel of the Live View Window
To open the control panel of the Live View window, click the arrow button
on top of the window. You can access the following functions by using the
right and left arrow buttons on the control panel.
Figure 12-5
Tip: Administrator may also access live view and camera adjustment
settings using the GV-IP Device Utility:
176
12 Accessing the Camera
[Information] Displays the version of the camera, time of the local
computer, time of the camera (host time), the number of users logging in
the camera and the OCX registration path.
[Video] Displays the current video codec, resolution and data rate.
[Audio] Displays the audio data rates when the microphone and speaker
devices are enabled.
[I/O Control] Note this function is not supported by Mini Fixed Dome,
Mini Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube Camera and Wireless Cube Camera.
Provides a real-time graphic display of the input and output status. You can
force the output to be triggered by double-clicking its icon.
[Alarm Notify] Displays the captured images by sensor triggers and
motion detection. For this function to work, you have to configure the Alarm
Notification settings first. See 12.2.7 Alarm Notification.
[Camera Adjustment] Allows you to adjust the image quality settings.
177
Figure 12-6
178
12 Accessing the Camera


Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the image.
Contrast: Adjusts the relative differences between one pixel and the
next.

Saturation: Adjusts the saturation of the image.

Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness of the image

Gamma: Adjusts the relative proportions of bright and dark areas

White balance: The camera automatically adjusts the color to be
closest to the image you are viewing. You can choose one of the four
presets: Auto, Outdoor, Indoor, and Tungsten Lamp / Fluorescent.
You can also choose Manual to adjust the white balance manually.

Flicker less: The camera automatically matches the frequency of your
camera’s image to the frequency of indoor light sources, e.g.
fluorescent lighting. You can also select 50 Hz or 60 Hz manually. If
these don’t match, faint light and dark bars may appear in your images.
Check the power utility to determine which frequency is used.

Image Orientation: Changes the image orientation on the Live View
window.

Minimum Shutter Speed: The shortest duration that the image sensor
is exposed to light. The minimum shutter speed ranges from 1/5 to
1/4000 sec or to 1/8000 sec depending on the camera models. In low
light conditions, a fast shutter speed will lower color quality and image
clarity. For GV-BX110D, GV-MFD110, GV-BL110D and GV-PT110D in
such conditions, you can choose one of these presets: Auto (Low
Light, Balanced) to find a balance between shutter speed and image
quality, Auto (Low Light, Speed) to have smooth images at the cost of
image quality, or Auto (Low Light, Quality) to get the image in best
quality possible with less smoothness. For other models, select the
Auto option.
179
Shutter
Speed
Balanced
Quality
Image Brightness
Poor
Good
Excellent
Image Clarity
Poor
Good
Excellent
Image Smoothness
Excellent
Good
Poor
D/N: Select Auto for automatic switch between day mode and night

mode depending on the amount of light detected. Select Black and
white to switch the camera to night mode. Select Color to switch the
camera to day mode. Sets the light sensor’s sensitivity to switch
between day mode and night mode. The value 5 is the most lightsensitive. For details, see D/N, Special View Settings, 13.1.1 Video
Settings.
[GPS] For details, see 13.8.2 GPS Map Settings.
[Download] Allows you to install the programs from the hard drive.
Note:
1.
GV-PTZ010D only contains the Gamma feature.
2.
Saturation is not available in GV-PTZ010D.
3.
Tungsten Lamp is only available in GV-BX110D, GV-MFD110,
GV-BL110D and GV-PT110D.
4.
Shutter Speed is not available in GV-BX140DW.
5.
D/N is not available in GV-BX110D, GV-MFD110, GV-BL110D,
GV-PTZ010D, and GV-PT110D.
6.
Manual D/N adjustment (5-level bar) is not available for GVBX140DW.
180
12 Accessing the Camera
12.2.3 Snapshot of Live Video
To take a snapshot of live video, follow these steps:
1.
Click the Snapshot button (No. 5, Figure 12-3). The Save As dialog
box appears.
2.
Specify Save in, type the File name, and select JPEG or BMP as
Save as Type. You may also choose whether to display the name
and date stamps on the image.
3.
Click the Save button to save the image in the local computer.
12.2.4 Video Recording
You can record live video for a certain period of time to your local computer.
1.
Click the File Save button (No. 6, Figure 12-3). The Save As dialog
box appears.
2.
Specify Save in, type the File name, and move the Time Period
slider to specify the time length of the video clip from 1 to 5 minutes.
3.
Click the Save button to start recording.
4.
To stop recording, click the Stop button (No. 2, Figure 12-3).
181
12.2.5 Wide Angle Dewarpping
The live view can be curved especially near the corners. Use this function
to correct the warping of live view. To access this feature:
1.
Right-click the live view to display the drop-down list and select Wide
Angle Setting. The Wide Angle Dewarping Setting window appears.
Figure 12-7
2.
Move the slider at the bottom to correct the degree of warping. The
adjusted view is shown the right. Click OK to close this window.
3.
To enable this configuration, right-click on the live view and select
Wide Angle Lens Dewarping.
182
12 Accessing the Camera
12.2.6 Picture-in-Picture and Picture-and-Picture View
The full screen mode provides two types of close-up views: Picture-inPicture (PIP) and Picture-and Picture (PAP). The two views are useful to
provide clear and detailed images of the surveillance area.
Picture-in-Picture View
With the Picture in Picture (PIP) view, you can crop the video to get a
close-up view or zoom in on the video.
Navigation box
Inset window
Figure 12-8
1.
Right-click the live view and select PIP. An inset window appears.
2.
Click the insert window. A navigation box appears.
3.
Move the navigation box around in the inset window to have a closeup view of the selected area.
4.
To adjust the navigation box size, move the cursor to any of the box
corners, and enlarge or diminish the box.
5.
To exit the PIP view, right-click the image and click PIP again.
183
Picture-and-Picture View
With the Picture and Picture (PAP) view, you can create a split video effect
with multiple close-up views on the image. A total of 7 close-up views can
be defined.
Figure 12-9
1.
Right-click the live view and select PAP. A row of three inset windows
appears at the bottom.
2.
Draw a navigation box on the image, and this selected area is
immediately reflected in one inset window. Up to seven navigation
boxes can be drawn on the image.
3.
To adjust a navigation box size, move the cursor to any of the box
corners, and enlarge or diminish the box.
4.
To move a navigation box to another area on the image, drag it to that
area.
5.
To add more navigation boxes, to show or hide navigation boxes or to
change the frame color of the navigation boxes, right-click the image,
select Mega Pixel Setting and click one of these options:

Enable Add-Focus-Area Mode: Allows the user to add more
navigation boxes on the image. This option is not available when
7 navigation boxes have been drawn.

Display Focus Area of PAP Mode: Displays or hides the
navigation boxes on the image

184
Set Color of Focus Area: Changes the color of the box frames.
12 Accessing the Camera
6.
To delete a navigation box, right-click the desired box, select Focus
Area of PAP Mode and click Delete.
7.
To exit the PAP view, right-click the image and click PAP again.
185
12.2.7 Alarm Notification
After input triggers and motion detection, you can be alerted by a pop-up
live video and view up to four captured images.
Pop-up live
video
Captured
images video
Figure 12-10
To configure this function, click the Show System Menu button (No. 8,
Figure 12-3), and select Alarm Notify. This dialog box appears.
Figure 12-11

Motion Notify: Once motion is detected, the captured images are
displayed on the control panel of the Live View window.
186
12 Accessing the Camera

I/O Alarm Notify: Once the input device is triggered, the captured
images are displayed on the control panel of the Live View window.
For this function to work, the Administrator needs to install the input
device properly. See 13.2.1 Input Setting.

Alert Sound: Activates the computer alarm on motion and inputtriggered detection.

IE Window Pops up: The minimized Live View window pops up on
motion and input-triggered detection.

Auto Snapshot: The snapshot of live video is taken every 5 seconds
on motion and input-triggered detection.

File Path: Assigns a file path to save the snapshots.
187
12.2.8 Video and Audio Configuration
You can enable the microphone and speaker for two-way audio
communication and adjust the audio volume. To change audio
configuration, click the Show System Menu button (No. 8, Figure 12-3),
and select Video and Audio Configuration.
Figure 12-12
188
12 Accessing the Camera
12.2.9 Remote Configuration
You can upgrade firmware over the network. Click the Show System
Menu button (No. 8, Figure 12-3), and select Remote Config. The Remote
Config dialog box will appear.
[Firmware Upgrade] In this tab, you can upgrade the firmware over the
Internet. For details, see Advanced Applications, Chapter 15.
12.2.10 Camera Name Display
To display the streaming name on the image, click the Show System
Menu button (No. 8, Figure 12-3), and select Show Camera Name.
12.2.11 Image Enhancement
To enhance the image quality of live video, click the Show System Menu
button (No. 8, Figure 12-3), and select Image Enhance. This dialog box
appears.
Figure 12-13

De-Interlace: Converts the interlaced video into non-interlaced video.

De-Block: Removes the block-like artifacts from low-quality and

Enable DirectDraw: Activates the DirectDraw function.
highly compressed video.
189
12.2.12 Visual PTZ
Note this feature is only available in PTZ Camera and PT Camera.
The Visual PTZ provides two types of PTZ control panels on live images
for easy and direct PTZ operation.
Activating Visual PTZ
Click the PTZ Control button
(No. 9, Figure 12-3) and select Visual
PTZ. Alternatively right-click anywhere on the live view and select Visual
PTZ.
Figure 12-14
190
12 Accessing the Camera
1
2
5
3
6
7
4
8
9
Figure 12-15
The Visual PTZ Panel provides the following features:
No.
Name
Description
1
Zoom In
Shortens the apparent distance between the
camera and the view.
2
Zoom Out
Lengthens the apparent distance between the
camera and the view.
3
Focus In
4
Focus Out
5
Home
Brings the camera to the home point.
6
Auto Focus
Automatically adjusts the sharpness of the
camera view.
7
Preset Go
Starts a single movement in which the PTZ
Camera moves towards a point in live view.
8
Go Sequence
Starts a series of movements in which the PTZ
Camera moves towards at least two Preset
points in live view.
9
Auto Pan
Starts a horizontal movement of the PTZ
Camera in live view.
Adjusts the sharpness of the camera view.
191
Setting Visual PTZ Panel
Click the
.button on the top left corner and select Visual PTZ, the
following options will appear.

PTZ Control Type: Two types of visual PTZ control panels are
available.
 Type 1: Appears only when a movement of the cursor is detected
and disappears when it is static. When you place the cursor in one
of the eight directions, i.e. up, down, left, right, left up, left down,
right up and right down, a 5-level arrow appears. Click and hold
onto the required level to move the camera. The speed level is
indicated at the top right corner of the live view.
 Type 2: Appears with a click on the live view and disappears with
the second click. As the cursor points to one of the eight directions,
a 5-level arrow head appears. The further the arrow is away from
the visual PTZ control panel, the faster the movement and vice
versa. The speed level is indicated at the top right corner of the
live view.

Set Color: Changes the color of the arrow line and the speed
indicated at the top right corner of the live view. Alternatively, you can
right-click the live view (with Visual PTZ enabled). Three colors are
available: Red, Green and Blue.

Transparency: Changes the transparency level of the Visual PTZ
Control Panel. Ten levels range from 10% (fully transparent) to 100%
(fully opaque).
192
12 Accessing the Camera
12.2.13 I/O Control
Note this function is only available for Box Camera, Bullet Camera,
Vandal Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP Dome.
The I/O Control window provides a real-time graphic display of camera
status, I/O status, and alarm events. Additionally, you can remotely force
output to be triggered.
Figure 12-16

To display the I/O control window, click the I/O Control button (No. 10,
Figure 12-3) and select I/O Control.

The Alarm List is displayed in three levels. The first level indicates date,
the second indicates time, and the third indicates alarm ID. Clicking the
Reset button will clear the list.

To trigger an output device, highlight an output and then click the
Output button.
193
12.2.14 Visual Automation
Note this function is only available for Box Camera, Bullet Camera,
Vandal Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP Dome.
The Visual Automation allows you to change the current state of the
electronic device by simply clicking on its image, e.g. turning the light ON.
This feature is only available when the Visual Automation is set ahead by
the Administrator. For details, see 13.1.6 Visual Automation.
Figure 12-17

To access this feature, click the I/O Control button (No. 10, Figure 12-3)
and select Visual Automation.

To change the style of the set areas, click the green I/O button on the
top left corner. You will have these options:
194

Show All: Displays all set areas.

Rect Float: Embosses all set areas.

Set Color: Changes the frame color of all set areas
12 Accessing the Camera
12.2.15 Network Status
To view the network status, in the left menu, click Network and select
Status.
Figure 12-18
195
Chapter 13 Administrator Mode
The Administrator can access the system configuration through the
network. Eight categories of configurations are involved in the system
configuration: Video and Motion, I/O Control or Digital I/O and PTZ,
Events and Alerts, Monitoring, Recording Schedule, Remote ViewLog,
Network and Management.
Figure 13-1
13 Administrator Mode
List of Menu Options
Find the topic of interest by referring to the section number prefixed to each
option. The available options vary among camera models.
13.1 Video and Motion
13.2 Digital I/O and PTZ
13.3 Events and Alerts
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3
13.3.4
13.3.5
13.3.6
13.3.7
13.3.8
Video Settings
Motion Detection
Privacy Mask
Text Overlay
Tampering Alarm
Visual Automation
Input Settings
Output Settings
PTZ Settings
Email
FTP
Center V2
VSM
Backup Center
Video Gateway/Recording Server
ViewLog Server
RTSP
13.4 Monitoring
13.5 Recording Schedule
13.5.1 Camera
13.5.2 I/O Monitor
13.6 Remote ViewLog
13.7 Network
13.8 Management
13.7.1 LAN
13.7.2 Wireless-Client Mode
13.7.3 Advanced TCP/IP
13.7.4 IP Filtering
13.7.5 SNMP Settings
13.8.1 Date and Time Settings
13.8.2 GPS Maps Settings
13.8.3 Storage Settings
13.8.4 User Account
13.8.5 Log Information
13.8.6 System Log
13.8.7 Tools
197
13.1 Video and Motion
The GV-IPCAM H.264 can simultaneously process one video stream in two
different codec and resolutions. The dual-stream design benefits for lower
bandwidth environment, allowing Streaming 2 set with lower resolution and
codec for live streaming, and Streaming 1 set with highest resolution and
codec H.264 for best recording quality. Two setting pages Streaming 1
and Streaming 2 are provided for separate setup.
Comparison between Streaming 1 and Streaming 2:
Video Setting Options
Streaming 1
Streaming 2
No option. But
Watermark Setting
settings in
Audio in Source
Yes
Streaming 1 will be
Mechanical Iris Adjustment
automatically
Special View Setting
Streaming 2
Video Resolution
TV Out
applied to
Yes. Different resolutions can be
applied to Streaming 1 and Streaming 2.
Yes
No
Note:
1.
Audio In Source is only available in GV-BX110D, GV-PTZ010D
and GV-PT110D.
2.
Mechanical Iris Adjustment is only available in GV-BX110D and
GV-BL110D.
3.
TV Out is only available for Box Camera, Vandal Proof IP Dome
and Fixed IP Dome.
This section includes the video image settings and how the images can be
managed through Motion Detection, Privacy Mask, Text Overlay,
Tampering Alarm, and Visual Automation.
198
13 Administrator Mode
13.1.1 Video Settings
Figure 13-2A
199
Figure 13-2B
[Name] Rename the video stream. To display the name of video stream on
the Live View window, see 12.2.10 Camera Name Display.
[Connection Template] Select the type of your network connection.
Unless you select Customized, this option will automatically bring up the
recommended video resolution, frame rate, bandwidth and GOP size.
[Video Signal Type]
Select the video signal type, resolution and frame rate. The GV-IPCAM
H.264 series supports three codec options: MPEG4, H.264 and MJPEG.
For details on the resolutions and frame rates of each camera model, see
Appendix C
200
13 Administrator Mode
Note that for all the cameras (except GV-PTZ010D), the resolution options
available for sub stream vary with the resolution selected for its main
stream. For example, if a 4:3 resolution is selected for the main stream in
GV-BX320D-0, two options, 640 x 480 and 320 x 240 will be available for
its sub stream.
Most 3GPP mobile phone supports video streaming with MPEG4 video.
Due to the limitation of the bandwidth for 3GPP, only the resolution of
320 x 240 will be supported for mobile phone setting. For mobile phone
connection, see Mobile Phone Connection, Chapter 18.
[Bandwidth Management] When using H.264 or MPEG4 it is possible to
control the bitrate, which in turn allows the amount of bandwidth usage to
be controlled.
„
VBR (Variable Bitrate): The quality of the video stream is kept as
constant as possible at the cost of a varying bitrate. The bandwidth is
much more efficiently used than a comparable CBR.
Set the image quality to one of the 5 standards: Standard, Fair,
Good, Great and Excellent.
Maximal Bit Rate: When the system bitrate exceeds the specified
Maximal Bit Rate, the system will automatically lower its bitrate so as
not to exceed it. Select one of the bitrates from the drop-down list or
select Auto if you do not want to enable this function.
„
CBR (Constant Bitrate): CBR is used to achieve a specific bitrate by
varying the quality of the H.264 or MPEG4 stream. Select one of the
bitrates from the drop-down list.
[GOP Structure and Length] Set the maximum number of frames
between every key frame. The limit is 1 key frame for every 30 frames.
201
[Record Settings] The alarm settings allow you to capture images before
and/or after the motion or I/O events happen.
Note: This function is not available for GV-MFD110.
„
Pre-alarm recording time: Activates video recording before an event
occurs. Set the recording time to 1 or 2 seconds. The recording is
saved in the buffer of the camera.
„
Post-alarm recording time: Activates video recording onto the
inserted memory card after an event occurs. Set the recording time
from 1 to 30 seconds.
„
Split-interval: Sets the time length between each event file from 1 to
5 minutes.
„
Record audio: Activates audio recording when an event occurs.
[Text Overlay Settings]
„
Overlaid with camera name: Includes streaming names on live and
recorded videos.
„
Overlaid with date stamps: Includes date stamps on live and
recorded videos.
„
Overlaid with time stamps: Includes time stamps on live and
recorded videos.
„
Overlaid with digital input description: Note this option is not
available for Mini Fixed Dome, Mini Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube
Camera and Wireless Cube Camera. Includes the name of the
selected input on live and recorded videos.
[Watermark Setting] Enable this option to watermark all recordings. The
watermark allows you to verify whether the video has been tampered while
it was recorded. See 15.4 Verifying Watermark.
202
13 Administrator Mode
[Audio In Source] Note this function is only available in GV-BX110D, GVPT110D and GV-PTZ010D which contain a built-in microphone and also
allow you to install an external microphone.
„
Built-in Microphone: Enable the built-in microphone to record
sounds. By default the option is enabled.
„
External Microphone: Enable the externally connected microphone
to record sounds.
[Audio Settings] Note the configuration of audio compression is not
available for GV-BX110D, GV-MFD110, GV-BL110D, GV-PTZ010D and
GV-PT110D. Use the drop-down list to select between G.711 and AAC
options.
Note: The AAC option is only supported by GV-System version 8.5 or
later. For versions including and prior to 8.4, audio output will not be
supported if AAC is selected.
[TVOut] Note this function is only available for Box Camera, IR Arctic
Box Camera, Vandal Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP Dome. Select the
signal format of the Video Output on the camera as either NTSC or PAL.
Note: For smooth display of Box Camera, IR Arctic Box Camera, Fixed
IP Dome and Vandal Proof IP Dome on TV monitor, the video resolution
must be 1280 x 1024 or lower. If dual streams are enabled, the sub
stream must be set as
640 x 480.
[LED Control] Note this function is not available in GV-BX110D, GVMFD110, GV-BL110D, GV-PTZ010D and GV-PT110D.
„
Ready LED: Select Disable if you do not wish to use the Status LED.
203
[Mechanical Iris Adjustment] Note this function is only available in
GV-BX110D and GV-BL110D.
„
Auto adjustment: Click Start to automatically adjust the auto iris lens
and bring exposure to optimum.
[Special View Setting]
„
D/N: Sets the sensitivity of day-night mode switch. For a more
sensitive switch from day mode to night mode, set the sensitivity to 5.
 Auto: Select Auto for the camera to detect the amount of light
present and automatically switch to monochrome in a poorly-lit
scene. Move the slider to adjust the sensitivity level from 1 to 5.
 Black and White: Select this option for the live view to be in
monochrome.
 Color: Select this option for the live view to be in color.
„
IR Check Function: Note this option is only available for Box
Camera. This function determines whether the surveillance area is
illuminated by an externally installed infrared illuminator.
 Off: The default setting. The infrared illuminator will be constantly
off. It is advisable to enable this option when the color temperature
of outdoor lighting is 6000 K or above.
 On: The infrared illuminator will be constantly on.
 Trigger by Input / Trigger IR by D/N: Select this option for the
infrared illuminator to turn on under low light and turn off under
sufficient light.
204
13 Administrator Mode
Note:
1.
If an infrared illuminator is installed for outdoor surveillance, it is
suggested to use the Trigger by Input or the Trigger IR by D/N
function to avoid incorrect judgment of lighting and hence the action
of the IR cut filter. See 2.5.2 Infrared Illuminators.
2.
If you select Trigger by Input / Trigger IR by D/N option, make
sure you have set D/N as Auto and configured its sensitivity level.
„
Auto Iris: Note this function is only supported in Box Camera (except
fixed lens GV-BX110D, GV-BX130D-1, GV-BX140DW and GVBX520D-0), Bullet Camera, Vandal Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP
Dome. The option is designed for auto iris lens (DC drive). Enable the
auto iris function when the scene appears fuzzy and the Flicker Less
function does not help to improve the situation.
„
BLC: Note this function is not supported by GV-BX110D,
GV-BX140DW, GV-MFD110, GV-BL110D, and GV-PT110D. Select
On to enable Backlight Compensation (BLC). This function is used to
adjust the color intensity of scenes with strong light at the background.
Note: To access the BLC function in PTZ camera, see Other, 6.8.4
Image Settings.
„
IR Light: Note this function is only available for Vandal Proof IP
Dome and Fixed IP Dome. Select Auto for automatic switch between
day mode and night mode depending on the amount of light detected.
Select Off to completely disable IR LEDs.
205
13.1.2 Motion Detection
Note for models with firmware V1.07 or later (except GV-BX110D, GVMFD110, GV-BL110D, GV-PTZ010D and GV-PT110D), motion detection is
disabled by default. For all firmware versions of GV-BX110D, GV-MFD110,
GV-BL110D, GV-PTZ010D and GV-PT110D, motion detection is enabled
by default.
Motion detection is used to generate an alarm whenever movement occurs
in the video image. You can configure up to 8 areas with different
sensitivity values for motion detection.
Figure 13-3
206
13 Administrator Mode
1.
Select the desired sensitivity by moving the slider. There are ten
values. The higher the value, the more sensitive the camera is to
motion.
2.
Drag an area on the image. Click Add when you are prompted to
confirm the setting.
3.
To create several areas with different sensitivity values, repeat steps
2 and 3.
4.
Click Save to save the above settings.
5.
Click Reset to delete all the selected areas.
6.
If you want to ignore environmental changes such as rain or snow,
select Ignore environmental changes.
7.
If you want to ignore video noise when light changes, select Noise
Tolerance.
8.
If you want to trigger the alarm output when motion is detected, select
Output 1 and click the Apply button. To activate the output settings,
you must also start Input monitoring manually or by schedule. For
related settings, see 13.4 Monitoring.
207
13.1.3 Privacy Mask
The Privacy Mask can block out sensitive areas from view, covering the
areas with dark boxes in both live view and recorded clips. This feature is
ideal for locations with displays, keyboard sequences (e.g. passwords),
and for anywhere else you don’t want sensitive information visible.
Figure 13-4
1.
2.
Select the Enable option.
Drag the area(s) where you want to block out on the image. Click Add
when you are prompted to confirm the setting.
3.
208
Click the Save button to save all the settings.
13 Administrator Mode
13.1.4 Text Overlay
The Text Overlay allows you to overlay any text in any place on the camera
view. Up to 16 text messages can be created on one camera view. The
overlaid text will be saved in the recordings.
Figure 13-5
1.
Select the font, font style and font size in a pop-up window.
2.
Select the Enable option.
3.
Click any place on the image. This dialog box appears.
Figure 13-6
4.
Type the desired text, and click OK. The text is overlaid on the image.
5.
Drag the overlaid text to a desired place on the image.
6.
Click Set Font to modify the font settings.
209
7.
Click Save to apply the settings, or click Load (Undo) to revert to the
last saved setting.
8.
Click Preview to see how the text will appear on the image. Click
Close to end the preview.
210
13 Administrator Mode
13.1.5 Tampering Alarm
Note this function is not available for PTZ Camera and PT Camera.
The Tampering Alarm is used to detect whether a camera is being
physically tampered. An alarm can be generated when the camera is
moved, covered up, or out of focus. The alarm approaches include the
triggered output device and e-mail alert. To have the tampering alarm, first
set up these alarm approaches properly:
•
To trigger the output device when a tampering event occurs, enable
the output setting and select Tampering Alarm. See 13.2.2 Output
Settings.
•
To trigger the e-mail alert when a tampering event occurs, enable the
e-mail setting and select Tampering Alarm. See 13.3.1 E-Mail.
Figure 13-7
211
To configure the tampering alarm:
1.
2.
Select the Enable option.
If you want the camera to ignore any movement or scene change in
certain areas, click the
3.
button to drag areas on the camera view.
Select the desired detection sensitivity by moving the slider. The
higher the value, the more sensitive the camera is to scene changes.
4.
In the Tolerance Time of Alarm field, specify the time length allowed
for scene changes before an alarm is generated.
5.
In the Duration of Alarm field, specify the duration of the alarm after
which the triggered output device will be turned off.
6.
To trigger an alarm when the scene turns dark, e.g. the lens
of camera has been covered, select Alarm for Dark Images.
7.
8.
Click Apply to save all the settings.
Start monitoring to enable the function. To have output alarm, it is
required to start Input monitoring. See 13.4 Monitoring.
When the camera has been tampered, the output device can be activated.
To turn off the output device immediately, return to this setting page, and
click Restart Detection.
212
13 Administrator Mode
13.1.6 Visual Automation
Note this function is only available for Box Camera, Bullet Camera,
Vandal Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP Dome.
This intuitive feature helps you automate any electronic device by
triggering the connected output device. When you click on the image of the
electronic device, you can simply change its current state, e.g. light ON.
Figure 13-8
1.
2.
Select the Enable option.
Drag an area on the image of the electronic device. This dialog box
appears.
Figure 13-9
213
3.
Assign the connected module and output device. In the Note field,
type a note to help you manage the device. Click OK to save the
settings.
4.
5.
To change the frame color of the set area, click the Set Color button.
To emboss the set area, select Float Up; or keep it flat by selecting
Normal.
6.
Click the Save Set button to apply the settings.
7.
To perform the function, see 12.2.14 Visual Automation.
214
13 Administrator Mode
13.2 I/O Settings
Note the I/O settings are only available for Box Camera, Bullet Camera,
PTZ Camera, PT Camera, Vandal Proof IP Dome and Fixed IP Dome.
After installing the I/O device, you need to enable the I/O settings on the
camera. For how to install the I/O device on the camera, see the following
reference sections:
GV-IPCAM H.264
Reference section
Box Camera
2.6 I/O Terminal Block
Bullet Camera
5.4.1 Connecting the Camera
PTZ Camera
6.7 I/O Terminal Block
PT Camera
7.7 I/O Terminal Block
Vandal Proof IP Dome
8.5 Connecting the Camera
Fixed IP Dome
9.6 I/O Terminal Block
13.2.1 Input Settings
To activate the sensor input, select Enable.
Figure 13-10
215
„
Normal State: You can set the input state to trigger actions by
selecting Open Circuit (N/O) or Grounded Circuit (N/C).
„
Latch Mode: Enable this option to have a momentary output alarm.
„
Trigger digital output relay: When this option is enabled, the output
will be triggered once the input is activated.
„
Record: Enable this option to start recording when the input is
triggered.
„
Send Video to Center V2: Enable this option to send the images to
Center V2 when the input is triggered.
„
PTZ Settings: Note this function is only available for PTZ Camera
and PT Camera.
 Input On: Select a preset point to which the camera turns when an
input is triggered.
 Input Off: Select a preset point to which the camera returns when
the input triggering is off.
 Duration to set preset after input off: Specify the duration that
the camera stays at the Input On point before returning to the Input
Off point.
Note:
1.
Only GV-BX110D supports the wet-contact input device
(7V~30V). Other cameras all support dry-contact input device.
2.
The functions “triggering the output”, “starting the recording when
the input is triggered” and “sending video to Center V2” only work
after you start Input monitoring manually or by schedule. To
configure the input monitoring, see 13.4 Monitoring.
216
13 Administrator Mode
13.2.2 Output Settings
Select Enable to start the output device. Choose the output signal that
mostly suits the device you are using: N/O (Open Circuit), N/C (Grounded
Circuit), N/O Toggle, N/C Toggle, N/O Pulse or N/C Pulse. For Toggle
output type, the output continues to be triggered until a new input trigger
ends the output. For Pulse output type, the output is triggered for the
amount of time you specify in the Trigger Pulse Mode for x Seconds field.
[Alarm Settings] You can choose to automatically trigger the digital output
under these conditions: tampering alarm (not available for PTZ Camera
and PT Camera), disk write error (Rec Error) and full memory card (HD
Full).
Figure 13-11
217
13.2.3 PTZ Settings
Note this function is only available in PTZ Camera and PT Camera.
You can change the image settings, configure sequences, and access
settings including autopan speed, motor reset, digital zoom and system
default loading. For details, see Accessing the VISCA OSD Configuration
in 6.7.3 PTZ Camera Settings.
Figure 13-12
218
13 Administrator Mode
13.3 Events and Alerts
For the events of motion detection or I/O trigger, the Administrator can set
up two trigger actions:
1. Send a captured still image by E-mail or FTP.
2. Notify Center Monitoring Station, Center V2 or VSM, by video or text
alerts.
To have the above trigger actions, you must set the following functions in
advance:
•
•
•
Motion Detection (See 13.1.2 Motion Detection)
Input Setting (See 13.2.1 Input Setting)
For e-mail and FTP alerts, it is required to start monitoring (See 13.4
Monitoring).
219
13.3.1 E-mail
After a trigger event, the camera can send the e-mail to a remote user
containing a captured still image.
Figure 13-13
[Enable] Select to enable the e-mail function.
„
Sever URL/IP Address: Type the URL address or IP address of the
SMTP Server.
„
Server Port: Modify the port number of the SMTP Server. Or keep
the default value 25.
„
From email address: Type the sender’s e-mail address.
„
Send to: Type the e-mail address(s) you want to send alerts to.
„
Alerts Interval Time: Specify the interval between e-mail alerts. The
interval is between 0 and 60 minutes. The option is useful for the
frequent event occurrence, by which any event triggers during the
interval period will be ignored.
220
13 Administrator Mode
[Need authentication to login] If the SMTP Server needs authentication,
enable this option and type a valid username and password to log in the
SMTP server.
[E-Mail Alarm Settings] You can choose to automatically send an e-mail
alert under these conditions: tampering alarm (not available for PTZ and
PT Camera), disk write error (Rec Error), full memory card (HD Full),
motion detection and input trigger (not available for Mini Fixed Dome, Mini
Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube Camera and Wireless Cube Camera).
IMPORTANT: To send e-mail alerts upon motions, be sure to set up
detection area on the Motion Detection’s page.
For the related settings to send e-mail alerts, see 13.1.2 Motion Detection,
13.2.1 Input Setting and 13.4 Monitoring.
221
13.3.2 FTP
You can also send the captured still image to a remote FTP server for
alerts.
Figure 13-14
[Upload to an FTP Server]
„
Enable: Select to enable the FTP function.
„
Server URL/IP Address: Type the URL address or IP address of the
FTP Server.
„
Server Port: Type the port number of the FTP Server. Or keep the
default value 21.
„
User Name: Type a valid username to log into the FTP Server.
„
Password: Type a valid password to log into the FTP Server.
„
Remote Directory: Type the name of the storage folder on the FTP
Server.
222
13 Administrator Mode
„
Alerts Interval time in minute: Specify the interval between FTP
alerts. The interval can be between 0 and 60 minutes. The option is
useful for the frequent event occurrence by which any event triggers
during the interval period will be ignored.
[Alarm Settings]
„
Motion Detection: When a motion is detected on the camera, a still
image will be sent to the FTP Server.

Continuously send images upon trigger events (motion): A
sequence of snapshots is uploaded to the FTP Server when a
motion is detected. This stops as soon as no motion is detected.
„
Digital Input: Note this function is not available for Mini Fixed Dome,
Mini Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube Camera and Wireless Cube
Camera. Once the input is triggered, a still image will be sent to the
FTP Server.

Continuously send images upon trigger events (input): A
sequence of snapshots is uploaded to the FTP Server when the
input is triggered.
IMPORTANT: To send FTP alerts upon motions, be sure to set up
detection area on the Motion Detection’s page.
[Act as FTP Server]
„
Enable FTP access to the GV-IP Cam: The camera acts as an FTP
server, enabling users to download AVI files.
„
Use alternative port: The default port is set to 21.
To access the internal FTP server through a web browser, enter the IP
address or the domain name of the camera in your browser like this:
ftp://192.168.0.10
223
When you are prompted for Username and Password, enter the default
value 123456 in both fields. Then you should find the AVI files recorded
after trigger events.
To change login information of the internal FTP server, see 13.8.4 User
Account. For related settings to send FTP alerts, see 13.1.2 Motion
Detection, 13.2.1 Input Settings and 13.4 Monitoring.
224
13 Administrator Mode
13.3.3 Center V2
After a motion or an I/O triggered event, the central monitoring station
Center V2 can be notified by live videos and text alerts. For the live
monitoring through Center V2, you must already have a subscriber account
on Center V2. A camera can connect to up to 2 Center V2 stations
simultaneously.
IMPORTANT: To notify Center V2 server upon motions, be sure to set
up detection areas on the Motion Detection’s page,
Figure 13-15
225
To enable the Center V2 connection:
1. Activate Link: Enable the monitoring through Center V2.
2. Host Name or IP Address: Type the host name or IP address of
Center V2.
3. Port Number: Match the port to the Port 2 value on Center V2. Or keep
the default value 5551.
4. User Name: Type a valid username to log into Center V2.
5. Password: Type a valid password to log into Center V2.
6. Click Apply. The Connection Status should display “Connected” and
connected time.
7. To establish connection to the second Center V2 server, click the
Connection 2 tab and repeat the above steps for setup.
You can also find the following options on this Center V2 setting page:
„
Cease motion detection messages from: Stops notifying Center V2
of motion-triggered events.
„
Cease input trigger messages from: Note this function is not
available for Mini Fixed Dome, Mini Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube
Camera and Wireless Cube Camera. Stops notifying Center V2 of
input-triggered events.
„
Enable schedule mode: Starts the monitoring through Center V2
based on the schedule you set in the Select Schedule Time section.
Refer to 13.5 Recording Schedule for the same settings.
For related settings to activate the monitoring through Center V2, see
13.1.2 Motion Detection, 13.2.1 Input Setting, and 17.1 Center V2.
226
13 Administrator Mode
13.3.4 VSM
After a motion or an I/O triggered event, the central monitoring station VSM
can get notified by text alerts. For the monitoring through VSM, you must
already have a subscriber account on VSM. A camera can connect up to 2
VSM simultaneously.
IMPORTANT: To notify VSM server upon motions, be sure to set up
detection areas on the Motion Detection’s page,
Figure 13-16
227
To enable the VSM connection:
1.
Activate Link: Enable the monitoring through VSM.
2.
Host Name or IP Address: Type the host name or IP address of
VSM.
3.
Port Number: Match the port to the Port 2 value on VSM. Or keep
the default value 5609.
4.
User Name: Type a valid username to log into VSM.
5.
Password: Type a valid password to log into VSM.
6.
Click Apply. The Connection Status should display “Connected” and
connected time.
7.
To establish connection to the second VSM, click the Connection 2
tab and repeat the above steps for setup.
These options you can also find on this VSM setting page:
„
Cease motion detection messages from: Stops notifying VSM of
motion-triggered events.
„
Cease input trigger messages from: Note this function is not
available for Mini Fixed Dome, Mini Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube
Camera and Wireless Cube Camera. Stops notifying VSM of inputtriggered events.
„
Enable schedule mode: Starts the monitoring through VSM based
on the schedule you set in the Select Schedule Time section. Refer
to 13.5 Recording Schedule for the same settings.
For related settings to activate the monitoring through VSM, see 13.1.2
Motion Detection and 13.2.1 Input Settings, and 17.2 VSM.
228
13 Administrator Mode
13.3.5 Backup Center
For the supported version of different models, see Appendix D.
The connection to the GV-Backup Center allows you to back up another
copy of recordings and system log to the GV-Backup Center on an offsite
location while the camera is saving these data to the memory card. The
GV-Backup Center provides a PC-based storage and backup solution. For
details on the GV-Backup Center, see GV-Backup Center User’s Manual.
Figure 13-17
229
To enable connection to GV-Backup Center:
1.
Activate Link: Enable the connection to the GV-Backup Center.
2.
Host Name or IP Address: Type the host name or IP address of the
GV-Backup Center.
3.
Port Number: Match the communication port on the GV-Backup
Center. Or keep the default value 30000.
4.
User Name: Type a valid user name to log into the GV-Backup
Center.
5.
Password: Type a valid password to log into the GV-Backup Center.
6.
Backup Video: Select the streams to back up their recordings to the
GV-Backup Center.
7.
Compact Video: Select the streams to only back up their Key Frames
to the GV-Backup Center, instead of full recordings. This option is
useful to save the backup time.
8.
Resend all files: Select this option to send all the recorded files that
have received by the Backup Center again.
9.
Enable Schedule Mode: Enable the GV-Backup Center connection
on the schedule you set in the Select Schedule Time section. Refer to
13.5 Recording Schedule for the same settings.
10. Click Apply. The Connection Status should display “Connected” and
connected time.
230
13 Administrator Mode
If you have a failover GV-Backup Center server which provides
uninterrupted backup services in case the first GV-Backup Center failed,
configure the failover GV-Backup Center as below.
1.
Automatic Failover Support: Enable the automatic connection to the
failover GV-Backup Center once the connection between camera and
the first GV-Backup Center is interrupted.
2.
Host Name or IP Address: Type the host name or IP address of the
failover GV-Backup Center.
3.
Port Number: Match the communication port on the failover GVBackup Center. Or keep the default value 30000.
4.
User Name: Type a valid user name to log into the failover GVBackup Center.
5.
Password: Type a valid password to log into the failover GV-Backup
Center.
6.
Click Apply.
231
13.3.6 Video Gateway / Recording Server
For the supported version of different models, see Appendix D.
The GV-Video Gateway / GV-Recording Server is a video streaming server
designed for large-scale video surveillance deployments. The GV-Video
Gateway / GV-Recording Server (with recording capability) can receive up
to 128 channels from various IP video devices, and distribute up to 300
channels to its clients. With the GV-Video Gateway / GV-Recording Server,
the desired frame rate can be ensured while the CPU loading and
bandwidth usage of the IP video devices are significantly reduced.
The supported GV-IPCAM H.264 can connect up to two GV-Video
Gateway / GV-Recording Server. To send the video images to the GVVideo Gateway or GV-Recording Server, follow the steps below.
232
13 Administrator Mode
Figure 13-18
1.
Activate Link: Enable the connection to the GV-Video Gateway / GVRecording Server.
2.
Host Name or IP Address: Type the host name or IP address of the
GV-Video Gateway / GV-Recording Server.
3.
Port Number: Match the communication port on the GV-Video
Gateway / GV-Recording Server. Or keep the default value 50000.
4.
User Name: Type a valid user name to log into the GV-Video
Gateway / GV-Recording Server.
5.
Password: Type a valid password to log into the GV-Video Gateway /
GV-Recording Server.
233
6.
Enable Schedule mode: Enable the GV-Video Gateway / GVRecording Server on the schedule you set in the Select Schedule
Time section. Refer to 13.5 Recording Schedule for the same settings.
7.
Click Apply. The Connection Status should display “Connected” and
the connected time.
8.
To establish connection to the second GV-Video Gateway /
GV-Recording Server, click the Connection 2 tab and repeat the
above steps for setup.
Note: The three functions, Cease motion detection messages from,
Cease input trigger message from and Cease all messages from,
are not functional.
234
13 Administrator Mode
13.3.7 ViewLog Server
Note this feature is not available for GV-MFD110.
The ViewLog Server is designed for remote playback function. This server
allows you to remotely access the recorded files saved at the GV-IPCAM
H.264 and play back video with the ViewLog player.
Select Enable to activate the built-in server. Keep the default port 5552 or
modify it if necessary. For details on the remote playback, see 14.2.2
Playback over Network.
Figure 13-19
235
13.3.8 RTSP
The RTSP enables video and audio streaming to your 3G-enabled mobile
phone. The RTSP streaming is enabled by default.
Figure 13-20
„
Activate Link: Enable the RTSP service.
„
RTSP/TCP Port: Keep the default value 8554, or modify it if
necessary.
„
RTP/UDP Port: Keep the default range from 17300 to 17319, or
modify it if necessary. The number of ports for use is limited to 20.
„
Max Connection: Set the maximum number of RTSP and 3GPP
connections to the GV-IPCAM H.264. The maximum value is 10.
„
Enable Audio: Turns audio streaming on or off. For the supported
firmware versions, see Appendix D.
„
Disable Authentication: By default, when accessing live view
through RTSP command, the ID and password of the camera are
required. Select this option to disable the authentication prompt. For
the supported firmware versions, see Appendix D.
For details on remote monitoring with mobile phones, see Mobile Phone
Connection, Chapter 18.
For RTSP command, see Appendix E.
236
13 Administrator Mode
13.4 Monitoring
You can start monitoring manually, by schedule or by input trigger.
Note: See Note for Connecting to GV-System at the beginning of the
manual.
Figure 13-21
[Manual] Manually activates motion detection and I/O monitoring. Select
one of the following options and then click the Start button.
„
Select all: Manually starts both motion detection and I/O monitoring.
„
Camera: Manually starts recording. Select the desired recording
mode for recording.
„
Input: Note this function is not available in Mini Fixed Dome, Mini
Fixed Rugged Dome, Cube Camera and Wireless Cube Camera.
Manually starts I/O monitoring. When the sensor input is triggered, its
associated camera and output will be activated for recording and
alerting. For this setting, see 13.2.1 Input Setting.
[Schedule] The system starts motion detection and I/O monitoring
according to the schedule you have set. For schedule settings, see 13.5
Recording Schedule.
237
[Camera Status Icon]
: On standby
: Enabled for motion detection and input trigger
: Recording is on.
238
13 Administrator Mode
13.5 Recording Schedule
The schedule is provided to activate recording and I/O monitoring on a
specific time each day.
13.5.1 Recording Schedule Settings
Note this function is not available for GV-MFD110.
You can set the schedule for recording.
Figure 13-22
„
Span 1- Span 3: Set a different recording mode for each time frame
during the day. Each day can be divided into 3 time frames,
represented by Span 1 to Span 3.
„
Weekend: Enable this option to start monitoring all day on the
weekend and select the recording mode to be used. Define whether
your weekend includes Saturday and Sunday or Only Sunday.
„
Special Day: Set the recording mode on a specified day.
239
13.5.2 I/O Monitoring Settings
Note this function is not available for Mini Fixed Dome, Mini Fixed
Rugged Dome, Cube Camera and Wireless Cube Camera.
You can set the schedule for I/O monitoring to start.
Figure 13-23
„
Span 1- Span 3: Set different time frames during the day to enable
I/O monitoring. Each day can be divided into 3 time frames,
represented by Span 1 to Span 3.
„
Weekend: Enable this option to start I/O monitoring all day on the
weekend and define whether your weekend includes Saturday and
Sunday or Only Sunday.
„
Special Day: Enable I/O monitoring on a specified day.
Note: In Recording Schedule and I/O Monitoring Schedule, if the
settings for Special Day conflict with those for Span 1-3 or Weekend,
the Special Day settings will get the priority.
240
13 Administrator Mode
13.6 Remote ViewLog
Note this function is not available for GV-MFD110.
With the Remote ViewLog player, you can play back the files recorded at
the GV-IPCAM H.264 over TCP/IP network.
For the first-time user, you need to install the Remote ViewLog program
from the Software CD. To allow remote access to the camera, the ViewLog
Server built in the unit must be enabled. See 13.3.7 ViewLog Server.
For details on connecting to the camera for playback, see 14.2.2 Playback
over Network.
241
13.7 Network
The Network section includes some basic but important network
configurations that enable the camera to be connected to a TCP/IP
network.
13.7.1 LAN Configuration
According to your network environment, select among Static IP, DHCP and
PPPoE.
Figure 13-24
242
13 Administrator Mode
[LAN Configuration]
Note the wireless option is only available in GV-CBW120 / 220. According
to the network environment, select Wired or Wireless. Before enabling the
Wireless option, follow the steps in 10.2 Configuring the Wireless
Connection to configure the wireless settings first.
[LAN Configuration]
„
Dynamic IP address: The network environment has a DHCP server
which will automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the camera.
Click the Test DHCP button to see the currently assigned IP address
or look up the dynamic IP address using GV-IP Device Utility.
„
Static IP address: Assign a static IP or fixed IP to the camera. Type
the camera’s TCP/IP and DNS parameters in the Configure
connection parameters section.
„
PPPoE: The network environment is xDSL connection. Type the
Username and Password provided by ISP to establish the connection.
If you use the xDSL connection with dynamic IP addresses, first use
the DDNS function to obtain a domain name linking to the camera’s
changing IP address.
[Configure connection parameters]
Type the camera’s IP address, Subnet Mask, Router/Gateway, Primary
DNS server and Secondary DNS server.
Parameters
IP address
Subnet Mask
Router/Gateway
Primary DNS server
Secondary DNS server
Default
Wired Ethernet
Wireless
192.168.0.10
192.168.100.10
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.1
192.168.0.1
192.168.0.1
192.168.0.1
192.168.0.2
192.168.0.2
For details on Dynamic DNS Server Settings, see 13.7.3 Advanced TCP/IP.
243
13.7.2 Wireless Client Mode
Note this function is only supported in GV-CBW120 / 220. Set up the client
mode before enabling the wireless function.
Figure 13-25
„
Network type: Select the network mode Ad Hoc or Infrastructure.
 Infrastructure: Connect to the Internet via the Access Point. This
mode further gives wireless access to the Internet or data sharing
under a previously wired environment.
 Ad-Hoc: A Peer-to-Peer mode. This mode connects to other
computer with the WLAN card, and does not need the Access
Point to connect to each other.
„
Network name (SSID): The SSID (Service Set Identify) is a unique
name that identifies a particular wireless network. Type SSID of the
Wireless LAN group or Access Point you are going to connect to.
244
13 Administrator Mode
„
Access Point Survey: Click this button to search all the available
Access Points (Infrastructure mode) and wireless stations (AD-Hoc
mode) within the LAN.
„
Authentication Type: Select one of these network authentication and
data encryption: Disable, WEP, WPAPSK-TKIP, WPAPSK-AES,
WPA2PSK-TKIP or WPA2PSK-AES.
 Disabled: No authentication is needed within the wireless network.
 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy): A type of data encryption.
Type up to four WEP Keys in HEX or ASCII format. Note that if
you use HEX format, only digits 0-9 and letters A-F, a-f are valid.
 WPAPSK-TKIP and WPA2PSK-TKIP: Type WPA-PSK (Pre-
Shared Key) for data encryption.
 WPAPSK-AES and WPA2PSK-AES: Type WPA-PSK (Pre-
Shared Key) for data encryption.
For step-by-step instruction on wireless connection, see 11.2 Configuring
the Wireless Connection.
Note:
1. Your encryption settings must match those used by the Access Points
or wireless stations with which you want to associate.
2. When you lose the wireless access, you can still access the unit by
connecting it to a LAN and search for the camera using GV IP Device
Utility.
3. When Ad Hoc is used, only WEP encryption is supported.
245
13.7.3 Advanced TCP/IP
This section provides the advanced TCP/IP settings, including DDNS
Server, HTTP port, HTTPS, streaming port, UPnP, QoS and network
connection check.
Figure 13-26
246
13 Administrator Mode
[Dynamic DNS Server Settings] DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System)
provides a convenient way of accessing the camera when using a dynamic
IP. DDNS assigns a domain name to the camera, so that the Administrator
does not need to go through the trouble of checking if the IP address
assigned by DHCP Server or ISP (in xDSL connection) has changed.
Before enabling the following DDNS function, the Administrator should
have applied for a Host Name from the DDNS service provider’s website.
There are 2 providers listed in the camera: GeoVision DDNS Server and
DynDNS.org.
To enable the DDNS function:
1.
Enable: Enable the DDNS function.
2.
Service Provider: Select the DDNS service provider you have
registered with.
3.
Host Name: Type the host name used to link to the camera. For the
users of GeoVision DDNS Server, it is unnecessary to fill the field
because the host name will be detected and brought up automatically.
4.
User Name: Type the username used to enable the service from the
DDNS.
5.
Password: Type the password used to enable the service from the
DDNS.
6.
Click Apply.
[HTTP Port Settings] The HTTP port enables connection of the camera to
the web. For security integration, the Administrator can hide the server
from the general HTTP port by changing the default HTTP port of 80 to a
different port number within the range of 1024 through 65535.
247
[HTTPS Settings] By enabling the Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
(HTTPS) settings, you can access the camera through a secure protocol.
You can use self-generated Certificate and Private Key or the ones verified
by the SSL authority. Click Browse to locate the Certificate and Private
Key files and type the password if the .pem files are protected by password.
Click Apply. The Web interface will be restarted and you will need to log in
again.
Note: The .pem file format is supported by Certificate and Private Key.
[GV-IPCAM Streaming Port Settings] The VSS port enables connecting
the camera to the GV-System. The default setting is 10000.
[UPnP Settings] UPnP (Universal Plug & Play) is a networking
architecture that provides compatibility among networking equipment,
software and peripherals of the 400+ vendors that are part of the Universal
Plug and Play Forum. It means that they are listed in the network devices
table for the operating system (such as Windows XP) supported by this
function. Enabling this function means you can connect to the camera
directly by clicking on the camera listed in the network devices table.
[QoS Settings] The Quality of Service (QoS) is a bandwidth control
mechanism that guarantees delay-sensitive data flows such as voice and
video streams, obtain a certain amount of bandwidth to keep the streaming
smooth.
To apply QoS to GV-IPCAM H.264, all network routers must support QoS
and QoS must be enabled on these devices. To enable the QoS on GVIPCAM H.264, enter a Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value.
This value is a field in an IP packet that enables different levels of services
248
13 Administrator Mode
for the network traffic. When the video stream from GV-IPCAM H.264
reaches a router, the DSCP value will tell the router what service level to
be applied, e.g. the bandwidth amount. This value ranges from 0 to 63 in
decimal format. The default value is 0, meaning QoS is disabled.
[Network Connection Check Settings] The camera checks for Internet
connection, and reboots when it is disconnected from the Internet. This
function is enabled by default.
Note: If you do not intend to connect the camera to the network,
disable this function to prevent automatic reboot.
249
13.7.4 IP Filter Settings
The Administrator can set IP filtering to restrict access to the camera.
Figure 13-27
To enable the IP Filter function:
1.
Enable IP Filtering: Enable the IP Filter function.
2.
Filtered IP: Type one IP address or a range of IP addresses you want
to restrict the access.
3.
Action to take: Select the action of Allow or Deny to be taken for
the IP address(es) you have specified.
4.
250
Click Apply.
13 Administrator Mode
13.7.5 SNMP Settings
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) allows you to monitor
the status of the camera through SNMP network management software.
Figure 13-28
251
1.
2.
Select Enable SNMPv1 SNMPv2c to enable the function.
To enable access to Read/Write community, type a community
string. This will serve as a password to allow read and write access to
the camera from the SNMP software.
3.
To enable Read only community, type a community string to allow
read-only access to the camera from the SNMP software.
4.
For a more secured connection, select Enable SNMPv3 to enable
SNMP version 3.
5.
To enable access to SNMPv3 Read/Write community, type a
community string.
6.
Select an Authentication Type to use for SNMP requests.
7.
Type the Authentication Password and Encryption Password. You
will need to type these passwords in the SNMP software to be able to
access the camera.
8.
To enable access to SNMPv3 Read only community, follow steps
5 ~ 7.
9.
252
Click Apply to save the settings.
13 Administrator Mode
13.8 Management
The Management section includes the settings of data and time and user
account. You can also view the firmware version and execute certain
system operations.
13.8.1 Date & Time Settings
The date and time settings are used for date and time stamps on the image.
Figure 13-29
253
[Date & Time on GV-IP Camera] Displays the current date and time on
the camera.
[Time Zone] Sets the time zone for local settings. Select Enable Daylight
Saving Time to automatically adjust the camera for daylight saving time.
Type the Start Time and End Time to enable the daylight saving function.
To play back, see 14.2.4 Playback of Daylight Saving Time Events. To
automatically synchronize the Daylight Saving Time with the GV-System,
see 16.1.1 Customizing IP Camera Settings.
[Synchronized with a Network Time Server] By default, the camera uses
the timeserver of time.windows.com to automatically update its internal
clock every 24 hours. You can change the host name or IP setting to the
timeserver of interest, and specify a time for time update.
[Synchronized with your computer or modify manually] Manually
changes the camera’s date and time. Or, synchronize the camera’s date
and time with those of the local computer.
[Overlaid Date and Time Settings] Select the display format of date and
time stamps on the image. For this function to work, you must also enable
the Overlaid with date stamps and Overlaid with time stamps options in
Figure 13-2.
254
13 Administrator Mode
13.8.2 GPS Maps Settings
The Maps Settings allows you to see the location of your GV-IPCAM H.264
on Google maps, without a GPS device.
To see the location of your camera on maps:
1.
It is required to sign up for a Google Maps API key before using the
Google Maps. Click Link to the Google Maps API.
Figure 13-30
2.
Enter the registered Maps API Key, the longitude and latitude of your
camera, and location name. Click Apply to enable this function.
3.
Open the control panel of the Live View window.
Figure 13-31
255
4.
Click Open. A warning message appears.
Figure 13-32
5.
Right-click the warning message and select Allow Blocked Content.
The map will be displayed. The
icon indicates the location of your
camera. At the upper right corner you have options to view different
map formats, such as Satellite and Hybrid.
Figure 13-33
256
13 Administrator Mode
13.8.3 Storage Settings
Note this function is not available for GV-MFD110.
Based on Linux ext3 file system, the GV-IPCAM H.264 supports memory
cards for video and audio recordings. You need to format the memory card
by using the following Storage Settings. After being formatted, the memory
card will be ready to use by Linux OS of the camera.
Figure 13-34
[Storage Settings]
If Enable recycling is selected, when the space of the storage device is
lower than the specified space, the system will overwrite the oldest
recorded files.
If Enable recycling is not selected, the system will stop recording when
the specified space is reached.
[Keep days (1-255)] Specify the number of days to keep the files from 1
day to 255 days. When both Keep days and Enable recycling are
selected, the system applies whichever condition comes first. For example,
if the specified smallest amount of storage space comes earlier than the
designated keep days, then recycle is applied first.
257
[Disk Information]
This section shows the details of the attached storage device.
[Partition Information]
This section shows the partition details of the attached storage device.
To add a memory card:
1.
Insert the memory card to the camera.
2.
Click the Format button.
3.
After the format is complete, the partition information will display. The
maximum space for one partition is 200 GB.
To remove a memory card:
1.
Click the Remove button.
2.
When you are prompted to ensure the action, click Yes. The page will
be refreshed and the partition information will be cleaned.
3.
Remove the memory card from the camera.
Note:
1.
If Enable Recycle is selected, the available space of the storage
device must be higher than the space you specified at the Stop
recording or recycle disk when free space of disk is smaller
than x option. Otherwise no video will be recoded.
2.
The recording data may be lost if you remove the USB mass
storage device during recording.
3.
If you do not remove the storage device properly, the data cannot be
read in another computer. In this case, re-plug the storage device
back to the camera. The system will repair the data automatically.
When the system is repairing the data, the Remove field will display
“Repairing”.
258
13 Administrator Mode
13.8.4 User Account
You can change the login name and password of Administrator and Guest.
The default Administrator login name and password are admin; the default
Guest login name and password are guest. To allow a Guest user log in
without entering name and password, select Disable authentication for
guest account. To prevent automatic logout of an Administrator / Guest
account user after reboot, select Disable auto logout when reboot.
Figure 13-35
259
13.8.5 Log Information
The log information contains dump data that is used by service personnel
for analyzing problems.
Figure 13-36
260
13 Administrator Mode
13.8.6 System Log
For the supported versions, see Appendix F.
The System Log records the events in the four types of logs: System
Event, Monitoring Event, I/O Event and Login/Logout Event. With the
System Log, you can search and obtain the detailed information of an
event. To use the System Log, an SD/SDHC card is required to be inserted
to the GV-IP Camera H.264.
1.
For the first-time user of the System Log, first click Create to create a
system log database (access file) on the inserted SD/SDHC card.
Figure 13-37
Note: If you have created the system log database on the SD/SDHC
card, clicking Create again will clean your System Log.
2.
Select the log type System Event, Monitoring Event, I/O Event or
Login/Logout Event from the left menu of the Web interface.
3.
Select the filtering criteria. For example, we want to know the login
and logout information during a specific period of time.
261
4.
Click Query. The filtering results may look like the figure below.
Figure 13-38
262
13 Administrator Mode
13.8.7 Tools
You can execute certain system operations and view the firmware version.
Figure 13-39
263
[Host Settings] Enter a descriptive name for the camera.
[Auto Reboot Setup] Select Enable to activate automatic reboot and
specify the time for reboot in the sub fields.
„
„
Day Interval: Type the day interval between each reboot.
Reboot Time: Use the drop-down lists to specify the time for
automatic reboot.
[Repair Record Database] Click Apply to repair the database when errors
occur while playing back the recordings with the Remote ViewLog player.
Problems can occur when there are errors in firmware or damages to the
SD card.
[Database Status] Displays the repairing status of database.
[Firmware Update] This field displays the firmware version of the camera.
[System Settings]
„
Load Default: Clicking the Load Default button to restore factory
default settings. After applying the default settings configure the
camera’s network setting again.
[Temperature Status]
Note this function is not available for GV-BX110D, GV-MFD110 and
Cube Camera and Wireless Cube Camera. Displays the current chipset
temperature inside the camera.
[Reboot] Clicking the Reboot button will make the camera perform
software reset.
264
Chapter 14 Recording and Playback
Note this chapter and the function is not available for GV-MFD110
The GV-IPCAM H.264 can record video and audio directly to the memory
card. You can play back the recorded files on the GV-System or over the
TCP/IP network.
Note: See Note for Recording at the beginning of the manual.
14.1 Recording
To enable the recording function:
1.
Insert the memory card to the camera. See “To add a memory card”,
13.8.3 Storage Settings.
2.
If you like to set up the pre-recording, post-recording or audio
recording, see 13.1.1 Video Settings.
3.
If you like to set up the schedule for video recording or I/O monitoring,
see 13.5 Recording Schedule.
4.
If you like to configure the areas and sensitivity values for motion
detection, see 13.1.2 Motion Detection.
5.
If you want the recording to be triggered by input device, configure the
operation of input device. See 13.2.1 Input Settings.
6.
To start recording and I/O monitoring, see 13.4 Monitoring.
The camera will start recording in case of motion detection, I/O trigger, or
during the scheduled time.
14.2 Playback
These methods are available to play back the video files recorded at the
GV-IPCAM H.264:

Playback by using the memory card by connecting it directly to the
GV-System through a memory card reader

Playback by using the Remote ViewLog function over the TCP/IP
network

Playback by using the recorded files downloaded from built-in FTP
Server
14.2.1 Playback Using the Memory Card
You can play back the files recorded at the GV-IPCAM H.264 by
connecting the memory card to GV-System through a memory card reader.
However, GV-System is run on Windows system while the files recorded at
the GV-IPCAM H.264 is of Linux file system. To enable Windows to
recognize the files, you need to install IFS Driver included on the Software
CD.
1.
Insert the Software CD, select IFS Drives and follow the onscreen
instructions for installation.
2.
Run IFS Drives from Control Panel, and assign the drive name(s) to
each available partition in the storage device.
Figure 14-1
266
14 Recording and Playback
3.
4.
Run ViewLog.
Click the Advanced button
, select Reload Database and click
Video Server/Compact DVR. This dialog box appears.
Figure 14-2
5.
Click Add to assign the hard drive.
6.
Click OK to load the data to the ViewLog for playback.
Note: IFS Driver supports Windows NT / 2000 / XP / Windows 7. For
Windows 7, refer to ftp://geo-demojapan.dipmap.com/Technotice/GV_IP_Devices/Run_IFS_Driver_Win7.pdf
to see how to configure the settings.
267
14.2.2 Playback over Network
With the Remote ViewLog function, you can play back the files recorded at
the GV-IPCAM H.264 over TCP/IP network.
1.
The camera needs to allow the remote access with ViewLog Server
activated. See 13.3.7 ViewLog Server.
2.
For the first-time user, run the Remote ViewLog program from the
Software CD. Next time whenever you like to use this remote
playback function, access this option from the camera’s Web interface.
3.
When the Remote ViewLog player is open, you will be prompted to
select Remote ViewLog Service or Remote Storage System. Select
Remote ViewLog Service.
4.
When this dialog box appears, type the camera’s IP address, login ID
and password. Keep the default port 5552 or modify it if necessary.
Figure 14-3
4.
In the Host Type field, select GV-IP Device.
5.
Click Connect to access the files of the camera for playback.
268
14 Recording and Playback
14.2.3 Access to the Recorded Files through FTP
Server
The built-in FTP Server allows you to download the recorded files saved on
the memory card. You can play back the downloaded files of AVI format
with Media Player. For details to download files, see [Act as FTP Server],
13.3.2 FTP.
Note: To play back videos, ensure you have installed Geovision codec
on the computer. The codec is available on the software CD. If you have
installed the Remote Playback player on the computer, it is not required
to install the codec.
14.2.4 Playback of Daylight Saving Time Events
On GV-System, you can retrieve the events recorded during the Daylight
Saving Time (DST) period from the GV-IPCAM H.264 for playback. You
can also connect the memory card to GV-System for playback.
The following instructions describe how to retrieve the recorded files from
the GV-IPCAM H.264 over network. If you like to use the memory card for
playback, first follow the instructions in 14.2.1 Playback Using the Memory
Card to load the recorded files to ViewLog, and then follow Steps 4-5
below to play back DST events.
1.
The camera must allow the remote access with ViewLog Server
activated. See 13.3.7 ViewLog Server.
269
2.
To remotely connect to the camera from GV-System, click the Tools
button and select Remote ViewLog Service. The Connect to Remote
ViewLog Service dialog box appears.
3.
Enter the connection information of the camera, and click Connect.
Once the connection is established, the video events will be displayed
on the Video Event list.
4.
On the Date Tree, select the date of Daylight Saving Time. A separate
DST subfolder will be displayed as illustrated below.
Figure 14-4
5.
On the Video Event list, select desired events, and click the Play
button to start.
Note:
1.
2.
The playback function is only compatible with the GV-System of
version 8.3 and later.
The AVI file recorded during the DST period is named with the
prefix “GvDST”, e.g. GvDST20081022xxxxxxxxx.avi, to
differentiate from the regular AVI file named with the prefix “Event”,
e.g. Event20081022xxxxxxxxx.avi.
270
Chapter 15 Advanced Applications
This chapter introduces more advanced applications.
15.1 Upgrading System Firmware
GeoVision periodically releases updated firmware on the website. Simply
download the new firmware into the GV-IPCAM H.264 using the Web
interface or IP Device Utility included in the Software CD.
Important Notes before You Start
Before you start updating the firmware, please read these important notes:
1.
If you use the IP Device Utility for firmware upgrade, the computer
used to upgrade firmware must be under the same network of the
camera.
2.
Stop monitoring of GV-IPCAM H.264.
3.
Stop all the remote connections including Center V2, VSM, ViewLog
Server and 3GPP/RTSP.
4.
Stop the connection to GV-System.
5.
While the firmware is being updated,
A) the power supply must not be interrupted, and
B) do not unplug the Ethernet cable if the cable is the source of
power supply (Power over Ethernet or PoE supported).
WARNING: The interruption of power supply during updating causes not
only update failures but also damages to the camera. In this case, please
contact your sales representative and send your device back to GeoVision
for repair.
6.
Do not turn the power off within 10 minutes after the firmware is
updated.
7.
If firmware upgrade fails, you will need to restore the camera to its
default settings. For details, see 15.3 Restoring to Factory Default
Settings.
272
15 Advanced Applications
15.1.1 Using the Web Configuration Interface
1.
In the Live View window, click the Show System Menu button (No. 8,
Figure 12-3) and select Remote Config. This dialog box appears.
Figure 15-1
2.
Click the Browse button to locate the firmware file (.img) saved at
your local computer.
3.
Click the Upgrade button to start the upgrade.
273
15.1.2 Using the IP Device Utility
The IP Device Utility provides a direct way to upgrade the firmware to
multiple units of GV-IPCAM H.264. Note the computer used to upgrade
firmware must be under the same network of the camera.
1.
Insert the Software CD, select IP Device Utility, and follow the
onscreen instructions to install the program.
2.
Double-click the IP Device Utility icon created on your desktop. This
dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Search button to locate available cameras on the same LAN.
Or click the New button and assign the IP address to locate the
camera over the Internet. Or highlight one camera in the list and click
the Delete button to remove it.
Figure 15-2
274
15 Advanced Applications
4.
Double-click one camera in the list. This dialog box appears.
5.
Click the Firmware Upgrade tab. This dialog box appears.
6.
Click the Browse button to locate the firmware file (.img) saved at
your local computer.
7.
If you like to upgrade all the cameras in the list, select Upgrade all
devices.
8.
Type Password, and click Upgrade to start the upgrade.
Figure 15-3
Figure 15-4
275
15.2 Backing Up and Restoring Settings
With the IP Device Utility included in the Software CD, you can back up the
configurations in the GV-IPCAM H.264, and restore the backup data to the
current camera or import it to another camera.
To back up the settings:
1.
Run IP Device Utility and locate the desired camera. See Steps 1-3
in 15.1.2 Using the IP Device Utility.
2.
Double-click the camera in the list. Figure 15-3 appears.
3.
Click the Export Settings button. This dialog box appears.
Figure 15-5
4.
Click the Browse button to assign a file path.
5.
Type Password, and click the Export Settings button to save the
backup file.
276
15 Advanced Applications
To restore the settings:
1.
In Figure 15-3, click the Import Settings tab. This dialog box appears.
Figure 15-6
2.
Click the Browse button to locate the backup file (.dat).
3.
Select Upgrade all devices to import the settings into the same type
of device in the same LAN. To import password settings and/or
network settings, select Password Settings and/or Network
settings.
4.
Click the Update Settings button to start restoring.
277
15.3 Restoring to Factory Default Settings
Please refer to the corresponding section of your camera type and follow
the steps to restore factory default settings.
Box Camera
z
GV-BX110D
1.
Unplug the power cable and the network cable to start.
2.
Use a pin to press and hold the Default button on the back panel of
the camera.
Default button
Figure 15-7
3.
Power on the camera using the power cable or the PoE cable. The
Status LED on the front panel of the camera turns red.
Status LED
Figure 15-8
278
15 Advanced Applications
4.
Wait until the status LED turns off. This will take about 10 seconds.
5.
Soon after the status LED turns off, it turns red again and a clicking
sound appears. Then you can release the default button and the
process of loading default values is completed.
z
GV-BX120D / 130D Series / 140DW / 220D Series / 320D Series /
520D-0
1.
Use a pin to press and hold the default button on the back panel of
the camera.
Default button
Figure 15-9
2.
Release the default button when the status LED blinks.
Status LED
Figure 15-10
3.
When the status LED fades, the process of loading default settings is
completed and the camera reboots automatically.
279
Mini Fixed Dome
z
GV-MFD110
1.
Unplug the network cable to start.
2.
Unscrew the camera’s cover.
3.
Press and hold the default button.
Default button
Figure 15-11
4.
Power on the camera using the network cable. Wait until the network
LED turns off. This will take about 40 seconds.
5.
Soon after the network LED turns off, release the default button. The
process of loading default values is completed.
z
GV-MFD120 / 130 / 220 / 320 / 520
1.
Press and hold the default button.
Default button
Status LED
Figure 15-12
280
15 Advanced Applications
2.
Release the default button when the status LED blinks.
3.
When the status LED fades, the process of loading default settings is
completed and the camera reboots automatically.
Mini Fixed Rugged Dome
1.
Press and hold the default button.
Default button
Status LED
Figure 15-13
2.
Release the default button when the status LED blinks.
3.
When the status LED fades, the process of loading default settings is
completed and the camera reboots automatically.
281
Bullet Camera
z
GV-BL110D
1.
Loosen the camera’s cover and remove the Silica Gel Bag.
2.
Press and hold the default button for 50 seconds while plugging the
power cable.
Default Button
Figure 15-14
3.
Release the default button and the process of loading default settings
is completed.
4.
Insert a new Silica Gel Bag and fasten the camera’s cover
immediately.
282
15 Advanced Applications
z
GV-BL120D / 130D / 220D / 320D
1.
Loosen the camera’s cover and remove the Silica Gel Bag.
2.
Press and hold the default button for 4 seconds.
Default Button
Figure 15-15
3.
Release the default button. When the process of loading default
settings is completed, the camera reboots automatically.
4.
Insert a new Silica Gel Bag and fasten the camera’s cover
immediately.
283
z
PTZ and PT Camera
There are two types of default settings: camera default settings and
system default settings. Camera default settings include all settings on
Iris, White Balance, Image Reverse and Other in the VISCA OSD
Configuration dialog box (Figure 15-16). System default settings refer to all
the settings of the PTZ / PT camera except the camera settings.
z
To load camera default settings (only available in PTZ camera):
1.
On the left menu of Web interface, select Digital I/O and PTZ, select
PTZ Settings, and select System Configure. The VISCA OSD
Configure dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Load Camera Default button.
Figure 15-16
284
15 Advanced Applications
z
To load system default settings:
1.
Unplug the power cable or the network cable (if it is also used as the
power supply).
2.
Press and hold the default button (No. 10, Figure 6-1).
3.
Power on the camera using the power cable or the PoE cable.
4.
Hold the default button until the two network LEDs fade. This will take
about 25 seconds.
Network LEDs
Figure 15-17
5.
When default loading is completed, the camera will pan and tilt to its
full range and return to the home point.
Vandal Proof IP Dome
1.
Use a pin to press and hold the default button on the inner housing.
Default button
Status LED
Figure 15-18
2.
Release the default button when the status LED blinks.
285
3.
When the status LED fades, the process of loading default settings is
completed and the camera reboots automatically.
Fixed IP Dome
1.
Use a pin to press and hold the default button on the panel.
Default button
Status LED
Figure 15-19
2.
Release the default button when the status LED blinks.
3.
When the status LED fades, the process of loading default settings is
completed and the camera reboots automatically.
286
15 Advanced Applications
Cube Camera
1.
Use a pin to press and hold the default button on the panel.
Default button
Status LED
Figure 15-20
2.
Release the default button when the status LED blinks.
3.
When the status LED fades, the process of loading default settings is
completed and the camera reboots automatically.
287
15.4 Verifying Watermark
The watermark is an encrypted and digital signature embedded in the
video stream during the compression stage, protecting the video from the
moment of creation. Watermarking ensures that an image is not edited or
damaged after it is recorded. To enable the watermark function, see
[Watermark Setting], 13.1.1 Video Settings.
The Watermark Proof is a watermark-checking program. It can verify the
authenticity of the recording before you present it in court.
288
15 Advanced Applications
15.4.1 Accessing AVI Files
To verify watermark, first you have to access the recorded AVI files by one
of these methods:
1.
Use the File Save function (No.6, Figure 12-3) to start recording on
the local computer.
2.
Use the Act as FTP Server function to download AVI files from the
GV-IPCAM H.264. See 13.3.2 FTP.
3.
Use the files recorded on the memory card. Since the files saved on
the memory card are of Linux file system, remember to run IFS
Drives from the Software CD to convert the Linux-based files to
Windows-based files. For the instructions, see Steps 1 to 2 in 14.2.1
Playback Using the Memory Card.
289
15.4.2 Running Watermark Proof
1.
Install Watermark Proof from the Software CD. After installation, a
WMProof icon is created on your desktop.
2.
Double-click the created icon. The Water Mark Proof window appears.
3.
Click File from the menu bar, select Open and locate the recording
(.avi). The selected recording is then listed on the window.
Alternatively, you can drag the recording directly from the storage
folder to the window.
4.
If the recording is unmodified, a check mark will appear in the Pass
column. On the contrary, if the recording is modified or does not
contain watermark during recording, a check mark would appear in
the Failed column. To review the recording, double-click the listed file
on the window.
290
15 Advanced Applications
15.4.3 The Watermark Proof Window
Figure 15-21
The controls in the window:
No. Name
Description
1
Open File
Opens the recording.
2
First Frame
Goes to the first frame of the file.
3
Play
Plays the file.
4
Previous Frame
Goes to the previous frame of the file.
5
Next Frame
Goes to the next frame of the file.
6
Previous
Goes to the previous frame that contains
Watermarked Frame watermark.
7
Next Watermarked
Frame
Goes to the next frame that contains
watermark.
8
Original vs.
Extracted
The Extracted icon should be identical with the
Original icon. If not, it indicates the recording
has been tampered.
9
File List
Displays the proof results.
291
15.5 Downloading Videos from the SD Card
When connections of GV-IP Cameras to the GV-System are lost,
recordings are automatically saved to the memory cards inserted in the
GV-IP Cameras. To automatically synchronize and download recordings
from the SD cards to a local folder, install and execute the
GV-SDCardSync Utility program.
Note: GV-SDSyncCard Utility is only supported in GV-System V8.5.4 or
later and in GV-IPCam H.264 V1.11 or later.
292
15 Advanced Applications
15.5.1 Installing the GV-SDCardSync Utility
1.
Download the GV-SD Card Sync Utility program from
http://ftp.geovision.tw/FTP/neo/Utility/GvSDCardSync_Setup.zip
Note: The GV-SD Card Sync Utility must be installed on the computer
installed with GV-System V8.5.4 or later.
2.
Execute the GV-SDCard Sync Utility program. The main window and
the Setting window appear. The Setting window pops up automatically
upon first execution. Otherwise, click the Setting button
.
Figure 15-22
293
3.
To configure synchronization, network and startup settings, see the
steps below.
Figure 15-23
[Synchronization]
294
„
Synchronize automatically at an interval: Automatically
synchronize videos from SD cards to a local folder at the
specified interval.
„
Synchronize automatically at: Automatically synchronize
videos from SD cards to a local folder at the specified time.
„
Download Audio Files: You may choose to download audio
files along with the video files. This option is enabled by default.
15 Advanced Applications
[Network]
„
Max. download speed of each device (Kb/sec): To make sure
the bandwidth is not completely taken up while downloading files
from the memory card, specify a maximum download speed. If
you do not want to set a bandwidth limit, type 0.
[General]
„
4.
Start up automatically at Windows login: GV-SDSync Utility
launches automatically when Windows starts up.
By default, downloads are saved to :\GvSDCardSync and are not
recycled automatically. To configure the storage and recycling
settings, select the Storage tab on the Setting window. This page
appears.
Figure 15-24
295
[Recycle]
„
Recycle when the storage space is less than (GB): Specify a
minimum free space of your local storage for file recycling.
„
Keep the downloaded files for (Days): Specify the number of
days to keep the download files at the local hard drive.
[Storage Location]
To configure the storage path, click the button next to the location
field and specify a storage location.
5.
Click OK to save the configuration or exit the Setting window.
Note: Keep the GV-SDCardSync Utility running in the background to
automatically synchronize and download videos.
296
15 Advanced Applications
15.5.2 The GV-SDCardSync Utility Window
After you have installed the GV-SDCardSync Utility, point to Start, select
Programs, select GV-SDCardSync and select
to launch
the program. This window appears.
Figure 15-25
No. Name
Description
1
Play Video
Plays downloaded recordings of the selected GV-IP
Cameras using the ViewLog player. For details, see
Chapter 4, DVR User’s Manual on Surveillance
System Software DVD.
2
Setting
Contains settings on synchronization, network,
storage location and recycling criteria. See step 4 in
15.5.1 Installing the GV-SDCardSync Utility.
3
Sync all
devices
Manually synchronizes and downloads the recording
files stored at GV-IP Cameras.
4
Shows information of GV-IP Cameras connected to
the GV-System, including channel number, IP
IP Camera Tab address, size and number of unsynchronized files,
download speed, status and the last synchronization
time.
5
Log Tab
Displays up to 100 event entries of the GVSDCardSync Utility. Once the entries are full,
recycling will start from the oldest file.
6
Storage Space
Shows the storage space of the designated hard
drive.
297
Note:
1. The synchronization time is recorded according to the system time
of the GV-IP Camera.
2. The logs are deleted once the GV-SDCardSync Utility is reactivated.
298
Chapter 16 DVR Configurations
The GV-System provides hybrid solution, integrating the digital videos from
IP cameras with other analog videos. For the digital videos, the GV-System
provides the complete video management, such as video viewing,
recording, playback, alert settings and almost every feature of the system.
Following is the integration specifications:
•
The compatible version of GV-System for each camera model:
Camera
Models
GV-BX110D
Compatible version
of GV-System
V8.3.2 or later
GV-BX120D
Box Camera
GV-BX220D Series
V8.4 or later
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
V8.5 or later
GV-BX520D-0
GV-BX120D-E
IR Arctic
GV-BX220D-E
Camera
GV-BX320D-E
V8.4 or later
GV-BX520D-E
GV-MFD110
V8.3.3 or later
GV-MFD120
Mini Fixed
GV-MFD130
Dome
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
V8.5 or later
16 DVR Configurations
Camera
Models
Compatible version
of GV-System
GV-MDR120
Mini Fixed
GV-MDR220
Rugged Dome
GV-MDR320
V8.5 or later
GV-MDR520
GV-BL120D
Bullet Camera
GV-BL220D
V8.4 (with patch
files) or later
GV-BL320D
GV-BL130D
PTZ and PT Camera
Vandal Proof IP Dome
Fixed IP Dome
Cube Camera
Wireless Cube Camera
V8.5 or later
V8.4 or later
V8.4 (with patch
files) or later
V8.4.3.0 (with patch
files) or later
V8.4.3.0 (with patch
files) or later
V8.5 or later
Note: For users of V8.5 and V8.5.0.1:
1. To establish connection to GV-BX140DW, select GV-BX120DW
as the device type.
2. For V8.5, to establish connection to GV-MDR120 / 220 / 320 /
520, select the corresponding GV-MFD120 / 220 / 320 / 520 as
the device type.
3. To establish connection to GV-CBW120 / 220, select the
corresponding GV-CB120 / 220 as the device type.
300
TCP/ IP
IP Camera
GV-System with
32-channel Display
IP Camera
Figure 16-1
•
The maximum number of streams which the GV-IPCAM H.264 allows
varies according to its resolution:
Resolution
301
Camera Models
Max. No. of
Streams
1.3 M
BX110D, MFD110, BL110D,
PTZ010D, PT110D
7
1.3 M
BX120D, BX130D Series, BX140DW,
BX120D-E, MFD120, MFD130,
MDR120, BL120D, BL130D,
VD120D, VD121D, VD122D,
VD123D, FD120D, CB120, CBW120
10
2M
BX220D Series, BX220D-E, MFD220,
MDR220, BL220D, VD220D,
VD221D, VD222D, VD223D,
FD220D, CB220, CBW220
7
3M
BX320D Series, BX320D-E, MFD320,
MDR320, BL320D, VD320D,
VD321D, VD322D, VD323D, FD320D
7
5M
BX520D-0, BX520D-E, MFD520,
MDR520
7
16 DVR Configurations
•
When a GV-IPCAM H.264 is connected to IE browser or any other
applications, it takes up 1 stream; when a GV-IPCAM H.264 is
connected to GV-System, it takes up 2 streams.
Note:
1.
The above maximum numbers of streams are based on the
maximum resolution for each camera and the codec H.264.
2.
By default, GV-IPCAM H.264 is in dual stream and will take up
2 streams when connected to GV-System.
•
The hardware compression and the “Pre-Recording Using RAM”
feature cannot work on the videos from GV-IPCAM H.264.
302
16.1 Setting up an IP Camera
To set up the GV-IPCAM H.264 on the GV-System, follow these steps:
1.
On the main screen, click the Configure button, select System
Configure, select Camera Install and click IP Camera Install. This
dialog box appears.
Figure 16-2
•
To add an IP camera from a list of the IP cameras on the LAN,
click Scan Camera.
•
303
To manually set up an IP camera, follow steps 2 to 7
16 DVR Configurations
2.
Click Add Camera. The dialog box appears.
Figure 16-3
3.
Type the IP address, username and password of the IP camera.
Select the camera brand and device from the drop-down lists. This
dialog box appears.
Figure 16-4
4.
The GV-System will automatically query for the IP camera, and the
status will be indicated as “Standby”. If not, modify the HTTP port
(Figure 16-3) and streaming port (Figure 16-4) to match those of the
IP camera, and click the Query button to detect the IP camera again.
304
5.
The options in the setup dialog box may vary depending on the
camera model.
„
Dual Stream: Click this button to set the codec type to H.264 in
the main stream and to MPEG4 in the sub stream, and each
stream with a different resolution. For details on supported
versions and resolutions in different cameras, see Appendix G.
„
Port: Video streaming port number.
„
Stream Number: You have the option of single streaming only
or both single and dual streaming.
„
Codec type: You have the option of MPEG4, JPEG, or H.264. If
the selected camera supports dual streaming, the preview codec
and recording codec can be set differently.
„
Resolution: Select resolutions for preview and recording.
6.
Click Apply. The IP camera is added to the list.
7.
Click the listed camera, and select Display position to map the IP
camera to a channel on the GV-System.
Figure 16-5
8.
305
The Status column now should display “Connected”. Click OK.
16 DVR Configurations
16.1.1 Customizing IP Camera Settings
After the IP camera is connected and assigned with a display position, you
can configure the camera’s settings such as frame rate, codec type and
resolution. Right-click the desired camera to see the following list of options:
Figure 16-6
„
Change Resolution: Changes the display ratio, live view resolution
and record resolution
„
Network Time Out: When network disconnection exceeds the
specified time period, the camera status will be displayed as
Connection Lost.
„
Change Live View Codec: Changes the live view codec.
„
Change Record Codec: Changes the recording codec.
„
Live-view frame rate control (Sub stream): Sets the live view frame
rate of the sub stream to help reduce the CPU usage. If you have set
the live view codec to be JPEG, select the number of frames to allow
in a second. If the live view codec selected is MPEG4 or H.264, select
one of the following options:
~
Maximum Live-view Frame Rate: View the video at the
maximum frame rate possible.
306
~
Live-view Key Frame only: You can choose to view the key
frames of the videos only instead of all frames on the live view.
This option is related to the GOP setting of the IP camera. For
example, if the GOP value is set to 30, there is only one key
frame among 30 frames.
„
Live-view frame rate control (Main stream): Sets the live view
frame rate of the main stream with higher resolution when On
Demand function is enabled. Refer to Live-view frame rate control
above to see the options available.
„
Image Orientation: You can adjust the image orientation by selecting
Normal, Horizontal Mirror, Vertical Flip or Rotate 180.
„
Frames to keep in live view buffer: Specifies the number of frames
to keep in the live view buffer.
„
Recording Codec Format: Specifies whether to record in standard
or GeoVision type of JPEG, MPEG4, H.264 codec.
„
GIS Setting: Records the video with the GPS data. To record the
GPS data, remember to also enable the GIS function of the GVSystem (Configure button < Accessories < Enable Local GIS).
„
Automatically Adjust DST: If enabled, the time on the GV-IP device
Web interface will be synchronized with the time of the GV-System
when DST period starts or ends on the GV-System.
307
16 DVR Configurations
16.2 Remote Monitoring with Multi View
You can use the Multi View to monitor and manage the GV-IPCAM H.264.
16.2.1 Connecting to the IP Camera
1.
On the Multi View window, click the Edit Host button. The Edit Host
window appears.
2.
To create a host, click the New button. You need to create a group
before creating a host.
3.
Select GV-IP Camera, GV-IP Speed Dome from the Device dropdown list. Type the host name, IP address, user name and password
of the camera. Modify the default VSS port 10000 if necessary.
Figure 16-7
4.
Click Save to establish connection.
For details on the Multi View functions, see “Multi View Viewer”, Remote
Viewing, DVR User’s Manual on the Surveillance System Software DVD.
308
16.3 Remote Monitoring with E-Map
You can use the Remote E-Map to monitor and manage the GV-IPCAM
H.264.
16.3.1 Creating an E-Map for the IP Camera
With the E-Map Editor, you can create an E-Map for the GV-IPCAM H.264.
The E-Map Editor is available in the two applications: Main System and EMap Server. The following is an example of running the E-Map Editor
included in the Main System.
1.
Go to Windows Start menu, point to Programs, select GV folder and
click E-Map Editor.
2.
To create an E-Map, click the Add Map button on the toolbar. A New
Map file appears.
3.
Double-click the New Map file, and click the Load Map button on the
toolbar to import a graphic file
4.
To create a host, click the Add Host button on the toolbar and select
Add IPCam.
5.
Right-click the created New Host in the Host View, and select Host
Settings. This dialog box appears.
Figure 16-8
6.
Give the camera a location name, and type its IP address (or domain
name). Modify the default VSS port 10000 if necessary.
309
16 DVR Configurations
7.
8.
Click OK to save the settings.
Expand the created host folder. Drag and drop the icons of camera
and I/O devices onto the imported E-Map.
9.
Close the E-Map Editor. Click Yes when you are promoted to save
the file.
For details on creating an E-Map file on the E-Map Server, see “E-Map
Server”, E-Map Application, DVR User’s Manual on the Surveillance
System Software DVD.
16.3.2 Connecting to the IP Camera
Depending on where you save the created E-Map file (DVR, E-Map Server
or Control Center), the steps to open the Remote E-Map window for
monitoring may vary slightly. The following is the connection example when
you store the E-Map file on the DVR.
1.
To enable the remote access to the DVR, click the Network button,
select WebCam Server to display the Server Setup dialog box, and
click OK to start the WebCam server.
2.
At the local computer, open the web browser and type the address of
the DVR. The Single View page appears.
3.
Select Emap. A valid user name and password are required for login.
For the first-time user, you will be directed to the Download page.
Install the E-Map program before you can run it.
4.
On the Remote E-Map window, click the Login button and select the
camera host to access its videos and I/O devices. A valid user name
and password are required to log in the camera.
For details on the Remote E-Map functions, see “The Remote E-Map
Window”, E-Map Application, DVR User’s Manual on the Surveillance
System Software DVD.
310
Chapter 17 CMS Configurations
This section introduces the related settings to enable connecting to the GVIPCAM H.264 in the central monitoring stations Center V2, VSM and
Dispatch Server.
17.1 Center V2
The Center V2 can monitor and manage the camera and I/O devices
connected to the GV-IPCAM H.264.
TCP/ IP
IP Camera
Video Data
Text Data
Center V2
IP Camera
Figure 17-1
17 CMS configurations
•
To set the appropriate port for IP camera connection, click the
Preference Settings button, select System Configure, click the
Network tab, and select Accept connections from GV-Compact
DVR, Video Server & IP Cam. Keep default port 5551, or modify it to
match the Center V2 port on the IP camera.
Figure 17-2
•
To define how to display the received video on motion detection and
input trigger from the IP camera, click the Preference Settings button
and select System Configure. This dialog box appears.
Figure 17-3
312
„
Manual close channel: Closes the triggered camera view
manually.
„
Close the camera view when motion stopped: Closes the
triggered camera view automatically when motion stops.
„
Post Motion: Specify the duration of the camera view remaining
on the monitoring window after a motion stops.
„
Camera send by I/O trigger will monitor: Specify the duration
of the camera view remaining on the monitoring window when an
I/O device is triggered.
To keep the camera view remaining on the monitoring window
even after the alarm is finished, click the right-arrow button, and
uncheck Latch Trigger. Then the camera view will remain on
the monitoring window for the specified time. For example, if the
alarm is triggered for 5 minutes and you set 10 minutes, the
camera view will be displayed for 15 minutes.
For further information on how to mange the video received from the IP
camera, see GV-CMS Series User’s manual.
313
17 CMS configurations
17.2 VSM
The VSM is designed to monitor and manage the camera and I/O devices
connected to the GV-IPCAM H.264 under low bandwidth network.
TCP/ IP
IP Camera
Text Data
VSM
IP Camera
Figure 17-4
•
To set the appropriate port connecting to the IP camera, click
Configure on the window menu, and select System Configure to
display this dialog box. In the Connective Port field, keep the default
port 5609, or modify it to match the VSM port on the IP camera.
Figure 17-5
For further information on how to mange the video received from the IP
camera, see GV-CMS Series User’s manual.
314
17.3 Dispatch Server
The Dispatch Server minimizes overloading of Center V2 Servers by redistributing GV-IPCAM H.264 subscribers to the least busy Center V2
Server.
TCP/ IP
Center V2
IP Camera
Video Data
Text Data
Dispatch Server
IP Camera
Center V2
Figure 17-6
315
17 CMS configurations
•
To set the appropriate port connecting to the IP camera, click the
Server Setting button on the toolbar, and select Allow GV IP
devices to login as subscriber from port. Keep the default port as
5551, or modify it to match the Center V2 port on the IP camera.
Figure 17-7
For further information on how to mange the video received from the IP
camera, see GV-CMS Series User’s manual.
316
Chapter 18 Mobile Phone Connection
Using a Pad, PDA, Smartphone or 3G-enabled mobile phone, you can
receive live video streaming from the GV-IPCAM H.264. The chart below
lists the GV mobile applications for GV-IPCAM H.264.
Handheld
Device View
OS Supported
Default Port
Windows Mobile 5.0
GV-GView V2
and 2003; Windows
Data Port: 8866
Mobile 6.0 / 6.1 Classic
RPB Port: 5511
and Professional for
VSS Port: 10000
Windows PDA
GV-MSView V2
Windows Mobile 5.0
Data Port: 8866
and 2003 for Windows
RPB Port: 5511
Smartphone
VSS Port: 10000
Windows Mobile 6.0 /
GV-MSView V3
6.1 Standard and
Professional for
Windows Smartphone
GV-SSView V3
3GPP
Data Port: 8866
RPB Port: 5511
VSS Port: 10000
Nokia S60 2nd Edition
Data Port: 8866
and 3rd Edition for
RPB Port: 5511
Symbian Smartphone
VSS Port: 10000
Mobile phones with
TCP Port: 8554
players supporting
UDP Port:
RTSP
17300~17380
Video Settings on
GV-IPCAM H.264
3GPPv7,
MSViewV2/V3,
SSViewV3 and
GViewV2 Supported
3GPPv7,
MSViewV2/V3,
SSViewV3 and
GViewV2 Supported
3GPPv7,
MSViewV2/V3,
SSViewV3 and
GViewV2 Supported
3GPPv7,
MSViewV2/V3,
SSViewV3 and
GViewV2 Supported
3GPPv7,
MSViewV2/V3,
SSViewV3 and
GViewV2 Supported
18 Mobile Phone Connection
GV-AView V1.1
Android V1.6 or above
Data Port: 8866
for Android
HTTP Port: 80
Smartphone
VSS Port: 10000
N/A
iPhone OS 4.3 or
GV-Eye V1.0
above for iPhone and
VSS Port: 10000
N/A
VSS Port: 10000
N/A
iPod Touch
GV-Eye HD
iPad OS 4.3 or above
V1.0
for iPad
Chart 1
Note:
1.
For the 3G-enabled mobile phone, you can receive live video from the
camera without installing any GV mobile applications.
2.
To receive the live video from the camera, enter the TCP/IP port on
your mobile phone. To play video back, enable ViewLog Server on
the camera and enter the RPB Port on your mobile phone.
Supported Resolution and Codec
Handheld
Device
View
GView
V2
MPEG4
MJPEG
H.264
MSView
V2 / V3
SSView
V3
320 x 240
320 x 240 or below
X
X
X
X
3GPP
Viewer
or below
X
X
X
X
AView
V1.1
Eye
V1.0 / HD
V1.0
704 x 480 or below
704 x 480
or below
320 x 240
1280 x 960
or below
or below
Note: A “X” mark indicates the mobile phone application does not support
the codec. The live view will not be displayed on the mobile phone if you
select the unsupported codec.
Chart 2
318
18.1 PDA
GView V2 is a remote view application for Pocket PC device. It can run on
the PDA with Windows Mobile operating system. For the supported
operating system version, see Chart 1.
When GView V2 detects the big screen panel of the mobile phone, images
from the GV-IPCAM H.264 will be horizontally rotated for a better view.
Resolution is set to be CIF by default.
18.1.1 Installing GView V2
GView V2 should be installed on a PDA device with Microsoft Windows
Mobile operating system.
1.
To download GV-GView V2, please go to
http://www.geovision.com.tw/english/5_4_gview.asp.
2.
Click the Download button.
3.
Consult your PDA user’s manual for how to install a program to the
PDA.
319
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.1.2 Activating the GView Function
To allow remote access to the GV-IPCAM H.264:
1.
Select 3GPPv7, MSViewV2/V3, SSViewV3 and GViewV2
Supported in the Connection Template field on the Web interface.
For details, see “Connection Template” in 13.1.1 Video Settings.
Figure 18-1
2.
Enable RTSP server on the Web interface. For details, see 13.3.8
RTSP / 3GPP.
320
18.1.3 Connecting to the IP Camera
Once GView V2 is installed on your PDA, you can use it to monitor your
GV-IPCAM H.264. Make sure your PDA has wireless LAN adapter properly
in place with access to the Internet.
1.
Execute GView V2 on your PDA.
Figure 18-2
321
18 Mobile Phone Connection
2.
Click the
button located at the lower left corner. The login screen
appears.
Figure 18-3
3.
Enter the IP address of your camera, port value (default value is
10000), a username and a password. Then click OK.
4.
Once the connection is established, the live image will appear.
322
18.1.4 Playing Back the Recordings from the IP Camera
To play back the recordings from the GV-IPCAM H.264, follow these steps:
1.
Enable the ViewLog Server on the camera. Keep the connection port
to be 5552 or modify it if necessary. See 13.3.7 ViewLog Server for
details.
2.
3.
Execute GView V2 in your PDA.
Click the
button located at the lower left corner Figure 18-2). The
login screen appears.
Figure 18-4
4.
Enter the IP address of your GV-IP Camra, port value (default value is
5552), a username and a password. Then click OK to connect.
5.
323
Select the desired video recording from the event list for playback.
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.1.5 Other Functions
In addition to live view and playback, GView V2 offers these functions:
viewing / controlling I/O devices, PTZ control, adjusting image quality, and
starting / stopping recording.
On the live view screen, click the buttons on the toolbar to have the desired
functions.
Figure 18-5
Button
Description
Click it to stop the connection.
Click it for Focus-in / Focus-out and Zoom-in /
Zoom-out control. This is only available when the
camera supports PTZ functions.
Click it to move the camera to different
directions. This is only available when the
camera supports PTZ functions.
Click it to move the camera to the preset
positions. This is only available when the camera
supports PTZ functions.
Click it to adjust the image quality.
Click it to access the connected I/O devices.
324
Button
Description
Click it to start or stop recording.
Click it to display the camera status.
The supervisor is given the highest priority to
control the PTZ camera and is not restrained by
the 60-second time limit. When the supervisor
logs in, the Timer shows 999.
Use this drop-down list to switch cameras.
Accessing I/O Devices
To access the connected I/O devices, use the drop-down list to select the
desired camera and click the
the toolbar.
Figure 18-6
325
button. The I/O module button appears on
18 Mobile Phone Connection
The numbers on the toolbar indicate the connected module. Click the
desired number to access its I/O devices. The I/O control buttons appear
on the toolbar.
Figure 18-7
Button
I
O
Description
Click it to view the log of input triggers.
Click it to display and force the connected output devices.
Viewing Input-Triggered Events
All input triggers are logged on the Alarm list. Click the “I” button to view
the list of trigger events.
Figure 18-8
326
Forcing Outputs
To force any connected output devices, click the “O” button to, and click
the desired number. The numbers on the toolbar indicate the connected
output devices.
Figure 18-9
Controlling PTZ Cameras
To control the PTZ camera, use the drop-down list to select the desired
camera, and click the
Figure 18-10
327
button on the live view screen (Figure 18-5).
18 Mobile Phone Connection
Button
Description
Click it to return to the previous page.
Use these buttons to move the PTZ camera to the
left, up, down and right
Click it to return to home.
Viewing Camera Status
To view the camera status, click the
button on the live view screen
(Figure 18-5).
Figure 18-11
This screen displays the status of camera activity. Three messages
indicate the current camera status.
Message
Description
Normal
The camera is turned on and not recording.
Inactive
The camera is turned off.
Recording
The camera is recording.
328
18.2 Windows Smartphone
With the MSView application, you can monitor your GV-IPCAM H.264
remotely through a Windows-based Smartphone. For the supported
operating system version, see Chart 1.
18.2.1 Installing MSView V2 / V3
1.
To download GV-MSView V2 / V3, please go to
http://www.geovision.com.tw/english/5_4_msview.asp.
2.
3.
Click the Download button.
Consult your smartphone user’s manual for how to install a program
to the smartphone.
329
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.2.2 Activating the MSView V2 / V3 Function
To allow remote access to the GV-IPCAM H.264:
1.
Select 3GPPv7, MSViewV2/V3, SSViewV3 and GViewV2
Supported in the Connection Template field on the Web interface.
For details, see “Connection Template” in 13.1.1 Video Settings.
Figure 18-12
2.
Enable RTSP server on the Web interface. For details, see 13.3.8
RTSP / 3GPP.
330
18.2.3 Connecting to the IP Camera
The following operations may vary slightly for different modules.
1.
Execute MSViewV2.exe or MSViewV3.exe on your Smartphone.
Figure 18-13
2.
Click Type and then Live.
Figure 18-14
331
18 Mobile Phone Connection
3.
On the login screen, enter the IP address of your camera, port value
(default value is 10000), a username and a password. Then click
Control and select Connect.
Figure 18-15
4.
Once the connection is established, the live image will appear. You
can use the scroll key on your Smartphone to navigate camera
channels.
Figure 18-16
332
18.2.4 Playing Back the Recordings from the IP Camera
To play back the recordings from the GV-IPCAM H.264, follow these steps:
1.
Enable ViewLog Server on the camera. Keep the connection port to
be 5552 or modify it if necessary. See 13.3.7 ViewLog Server for
details.
2.
3.
Execute MSView V2 or MSView V3 in your Smartphone.
Select Type and then Rpb (Figure 18-14). The login screen appears.
If you want to search the recordings within a specific period of time for
playback, select Rpb with time.
Figure 18-17
4.
Enter the IP address of your camera, port value (default value is
5552), a username and a password. Then click Select and click GV
Video Server to start the connection.
5.
333
Select the desired video recording from the event list for playback.
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.2.5 Other Functions
In addition to live view, MSView V2 or MSView V3 offers these functions:
zooming in/out a camera view, rotating images and controlling outputs.
Select the Control option to have these features.
334
18.3 Symbian Smartphone
With the SSView V3 application, it’s also possible to monitor your GVIPCAM H.264 remotely through a Symbian-based Smartphone. For the
supported operating system version, see Chart 1.
18.3.1 Installing SSView V3
To install SSView Version 3 for Nokia S60 2nd and 3rd Edition:
1.
To download GV-SSView V3, please go to
http://www.geovision.com.tw/english/5_4_ssview.asp.
2.
3.
Click the Download button.
Consult your smartphone user’s manual for how to install a program
to the smartphone.
335
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.3.2 Activating the SSView V3 Function
To allow remote access to the GV-IPCAM H.264:
1.
Select 3GPPv7, MSViewV2/V3, SSViewV3 and GViewV2
Supported in the Connection Template field on the Web interface.
For details, see “Connection Template” in 13.1.1 Video Settings.
Figure 18-18
2.
Enable RTSP server on the Web interface. For details, see 13.3.8
RTSP / 3GPP.
336
18.3.3 Connecting to the IP Camera
The following operations may vary slightly for different modules.
1.
2.
Execute SSView on your Smartphone.
When the message SSView V3 appears, select Options, and select
Live Connect. The login screen appears.
Figure 18-19
3.
Enter the IP address of your camera, port value (default value is
10000), a username and a password. Then click Options and select
Connect.
4.
Once the connection is established, the live image will appear.
Figure 18-20
337
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.3.4 Quick Connection
The IP addresses of connected servers can be stored for quick connection
in the future. Press the [<] and [>] buttons on the mobile device to select
the desired camera for connection.
18.3.5 Playing Back the Recordings from the IP Camera
To play back the recordings from the GV-IPCAM H.264, follow these steps:
1.
Enable ViewLog Server on the camera. Keep the connection port to
be 5552 or modify it if necessary. See 13.3.7 ViewLog Server for
details.
2.
3.
Execute SSView on your Smartphone.
When the message SSView V3 appears, click Options, and then
select Rpb. The login screen appears. If you want to search the
recordings within a specific period of time for playback, select Rpb
With Time.
Figure 18-21
4.
Enter the IP address of your camera, port value (default value is
5552), a username and a password. Then click Options and select
Video Server.
5.
Select the desired video recording from the event list for playback.
338
18.3.6 Other Functions
In addition to live view, SSView offers these functions: changing camera
channels, zooming in a camera view, rotating images and controlling
outputs. Select Options to have these features.
339
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.4 3G Mobile Phone
Without installing any GV applications, you can use a 3G mobile phone to
access GV-IPCAM H.264 directly.
18.4.1 Activating the 3G Mobile Phone Function
To allow remote access to the GV-IPCAM H.264, follow the steps below:
1.
Select 3GPPv7, MSViewV2/V3, SSViewV3 and GViewV2
Supported to be the connection type in the Connection Template
field on the Video Setting page.
Figure 18-22
2.
Enable the 3GPP Server on the camera. See 13.3.8 RTSP / 3GPP
for details.
Figure 18-23
340
18.4.2 Connecting to the IP Camera
1.
Open the Internet browser in the mobile phone, and enter the IP
address of your camera, a user name and a password. Then click
Apply to connect.
Figure 18-24
2.
After the connection is established, an image similar to this example
appears.
Figure 18-25
341
18 Mobile Phone Connection
3.
Select the desired channel. Its live image will appear.
Figure 18-26
Note: Currently the 3GPP application does not support remote playback
and I/O control.
342
18.5 Android Smartphone
GV-AView V1.1 is a remote view application for Android smartphone. You
can access the GV-IPCAM H.264 using Android version 1.6 or above. For
the supported operating system version, see Chart 1.
Download GV-AView V1.1 from Android Market, and after installing the
application., the GV-AView icon will appear on the desktop.
Figure 18-27
343
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.5.1 Connecting to GV-IPCAM H.264
1.
Double-tap the AView icon
on the main page.
Figure 18-28
2.
To see the installation guide, tap the Information button
3.
Tap the Add button
.
to type the login information of the GV-IP
device..
Figure 18-29
344
4.
Type the name, IP address, port number, user name and password of
the GV IP device.
5.
Tap the Add button
to add the login information to the address
book. If you want to edit existing login information, tap the Edit button
to save the information after making the changes.
6.
You can press the Menu button on the mobile phone and tap the
Setting button
to see the SIM card information or tap the
Address Book button
7.
Tap the Connection button
view will appear.
Figure 18-30
345
to see the address book.
to connect to the IP device. The live
18 Mobile Phone Connection
8.
The following function buttons are available on the bottom of the
screen.
„
Snapshot
„
PTZ Control
: Saves the current image in the mobile device.
: Enables the PTZ function. A message will
appear asking if you want to use Gesture Detector to control PTZ. Tap
OK if you want to be able to drag across the live view screen to
control the PTZ function in addition to using the PTZ control buttons
on the bottom of the screen. Tap the arrow button
. Tap the up button
home button
„
to switch
and the zoom/iris buttons
between the direction buttons
to exit the PTZ mode and tap the
to return to home position.
Screen Division
: Displays up to four channels on the same
page.
„
Dual Stream
: Switches between the video streams if the
GV IP device supports dual streams.
„
9.
Audio
: Enables the audio function.
If the GV IP device supports multiple channels, tap the numbers on
the top of the screen to switch to other channels.
346
18.6 iPhone, iPod Touch and iPad
With GV-Eye V1.0 / HD V1.0, you can connect to GV-IPCAM H.264 from
your iPhone, iPod Touch or iPad to remotely watch live view, force output
devices to be triggered and take snapshots. GV-Eye V1.0 is designed for
iPhone and iPod Touch, while GV-Eye HD V1.0 is designed for iPad.
18.6.1 Installing GV-Eye V1.0 / HD V1.0
You can download GV-Eye V1.0 / HD V1.0 from App Store and install the
application. The GV-Eye / GV-EyeHD icon will appear on the desktop.
GV-Eye icon on iPhone / iPod Touch
Figure 18-31
347
GV-EyeHD icon on iPad
18 Mobile Phone Connection
18.6.2 Connecting to GV-IPCAM H.264
To connect your iPhone, iPod Touch or iPad to the GV-IPCAM H.264,
follow these steps:
1.
Click the GV-Eye icon
on the desktop of your phone. The
welcome page appears.
2.
Tap the Add button. This page appears.
Figure 18-32
3.
Enter the Host name, Domain/IP address, port number, username
and password to log in to the GV-IPCAM H.264.
348
4.
Tap the Save button. The GV-IPCAM H.264 is now added to the
IPCam list and will be available the next time you access GV-Eye.
You can tap the Edit button and then select an IP camera to edit
existing device login information.
Figure 18-33
5.
Tap the device name to connect to the live view of the device. You
can tap the information button
connection information.
Figure 18-34
349
at the top-right corner to see the
18 Mobile Phone Connection
6.
The following function buttons are available when the iPhone, iPod
Touch or iPad is positioned vertically.
Button
Name
Function
Displays up to four channels on the
Screen division
same page if the GV-IPCAM H.264
supports multiple channels.
Enables PTZ control. Drag across
the camera live view screen to
adjust the camera position. The
following function buttons are also
available:
PTZ control
z
: Zooms in and out.
z
: Adjusts the focus.
z
Snapshot
: Moves the camera to a
preset location by typing the
preset number.
Saves the current image in the
mobile device.
Forces output device to be
I/O Device
triggered.
Note: The PTZ control and I/O device functions are only accessible on
devices with PTZ control and I/O devices.
350
Specifications: Box Camera
Camera
GV-BX110D
GV-BX120D
Image
Sensor
1/3" progressive scan CMOS
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
1/2.5” progressive scan CMOS
GV-BX520D-0
GV-BX140DW
1280 (H) x 720 (V)
GV-BX110D
GV-BX120D
Picture
Elements
Minimum
Illumination
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
GV-BX130D Sereis
GV-BX220D Series
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
GV-BX320D Series
2048 (H) x 1536 (V)
GV-BX520D-0
2560 (H) x 1920 (V)
GV-BX110D
Color
1 Lux (1/60 sec), 0.1 Lux (1/5
sec), (F/1.4, AGC-On, slow
shutter-Off)
B/W
0.1 Lux (1/60 sec), 0.05 Lux
(1/5 sec), (F/1.4, AGC-On,
slow shutter-Off)
0 Lux (1/60 sec),
IR ON (F/1.4, AGC-On, slow
shutter-Off)
Specifications: Box Camera
Color
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D-0
GV-BX130D-1
Minimum
Illumination
GV-BX140DW
B/W
(1/5 sec)
0.08 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.04 Lux
(1/5 sec)
IR ON
0 Lux
Color
0.5 Lux at F/1.4
B/W
0.1 Lux at F/1.4
IR On
0 Lux
Color
0.5 Lux at F/1.5
B/W
0.1 Lux at F/1.5
IR On
0 Lux
Color
0.2 Lux at F/1.4
B/W
0.08 Lux at F/1.4
IR On
0 Lux
Color
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series B/W
GV-BX520D-0
0.15 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.08 Lux
1 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.5 Lux (1/5
sec)
0.2 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.1 Lux
(1/5 sec)
IR ON
0 Lux
Color
0.5 Lux at F/1.6
B/W
0.1 Lux at F/1.6
IR On
0 Lux
352
Shutter
Speed
GV-BX110D
Automatic (Balanced, Speed Priority,
Quality Priority), Manual (1/5 ~ 1/4000
sec)
GV-BX140DW
Automatic
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX220D Sereis
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
Automatic, Manual (1/5 ~ 1/8000 sec)
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800K ~ 8500K)
Gain Control
Automatic
GV-BX120D
50 dB
GV-BX130D Series 45 dB
S/N Ratio
GV-BX140DW
50 dB
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series 45 dB
GV-BX520D-0
BLC
WDR
353
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX220D Series Yes
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
GV-BX110D
GV-BX140DW
No
GV-BX140DW
Yes
GV-BX110D
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
No
GV-BX220D Sereis
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
Specifications: Box Camera
Fixed Focal Lens (GV-BX110D and GV-BX130D-1 only)
Megapixel
Yes
Removable IR-cut filter for
Day/Night function
Yes
Focal Length
4.0 mm
Maximum Aperture
F/1.5
Mount
CS
Image Format
Angle of View
Operation
Torque (Focus Screw)
1/3”
Diagonal
80.4°
Horizontal
65.4°
Vertical
49.9°
Focus
Yes
Zoom
No
Iris
Fixed
3.9 ~ 4.9 N.cm
Varifocal Lens
Megapixel
Yes
Day/Night
Focal
Length
Yes (with removable IR-cut filter)
GV-BX110D
4 ~ 9 mm
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D-0
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D-3
2.8 ~ 12 mm
GV-BX220D-0
2.8 ~ 8.5 mm
GV-BX220D-1
GV-BX320D-0
3.1 ~ 8 mm
GV-BX220D-2
GV-BX320D-1
2.8 ~ 6 mm
GV-BX520D-0
4.5 ~ 10 mm
354
Maximum
Aperture
GV-BX110D
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D-0
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D-0
GV-BX220D-3
F/1.4
GV-BX220D-1
GV-BX320D-0
F/1.2
GV-BX220D-2
GV-BX320D-1
F/1.3
GV-BX520D-0
F/1.6
Mount
Image
Format
Angle of
View
CS
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D-0
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D-0
GV-BX220D-1
GV-BX220D-2
GV-BX220D-3
GV-BX320D-0
GV-BX320D-1
GV-BX520D-0
1/2’’
GV-BX110D
Horizontal
60° ~ 30°
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D-0
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D-3
Diagonal
115° ~ 45.3°
Horizontal
92°~ 27.2°
GV-BX220D-0
GV-BX220D-1
GV-BX220D-2
GV-BX320D-1
355
1/3”
Vertical
69° ~ 20.4°
Diagonal
94.45° ~ 32.47°
Horizontal
82.32° ~ 28.30°
Vertical
46.31° ~ 15.92°
Diagonal
108.7° ~ 41.21°
Horizontal
86.96°~ 32.97°
Vertical
65.22° ~ 24.73°
Diagonal
-
Horizontal
101.11° ~ 46.58°
Vertical
74.10° ~ 35.09°
Specifications: Box Camera
Angle of
View
GV-BX520D-0
Diagonal
102° ~ 47°
Horizontal
80.5°~ 37.12°
Vertical
60° ~ 28°
Focus
Manual (w/lock)
Zoom
Manual (w/lock)
Operation
Iris
Torque
(Focus/Zoom screws)
GV-BX110D
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D-0
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
DC drive
GV-BX140DW
Fixed
GV-BX520D-0
Manual
0.049 N.m
Operation
Video Compression
Video
Stream
Frame
Rate
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
GV-BX110D
Dual Streams from H.264, MPEG4 or
MJPEG
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
Stream 1 from H. 264 or MJPEG
Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or
MJPEG
GV-BX110D
15 fps at 1280 x 1024,
30 fps at 640 x 512
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-BX140DW
30 fps at 1280 x 720
GV-BX220D Series
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
356
Frame
Rate
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
20 fps at 2048 x 1536
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
10 fps at 2560 x 1920
Image Setting
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation,
Sharpness, Gamma, White Balance,
Flicker-less, Image Orientation, Shutter
Speed, D/N Sensitivity, Backlight
Compensation
Audio Compression
G.711, AAC (16 kHz / 16 bit)
Two-Way Audio
Sensor
Input
Alarm
Output
Yes
GV-BX110D
1 input (Wet Contact , 7V ~ 30V)
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
1 input (Dry Contact)
GV-BX110D
1 digital output (10A 250V AC; 10A
125V AC; 5A 100V DC )
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
1 Digital Output (200mA 5V DC)
Note:
1. The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the number
of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
2. D/N sensitivity and backlight compensation are not supported in GVBX110D and GV-BX140DW.
3. Manual adjustment of shutter speed is not available for GVBX140DW.
4. AAC is not available for GV-BX110D and is only supported by GVSystem V8.5 or later.
357
Specifications: Box Camera
Video Resolution
Main
Stream
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
Sub
Stream
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
GV-BX110D
Main
Stream
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Main
Stream
16:9
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
Sub
Stream
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
4:3
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960,
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720,
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Sub
Stream
GV-BX140DW
5:4
Main
Stream
GV-BX220D Series
Sub
Stream
358
Main
Stream
GV-BX320D Series
Sub
Stream
Main
Stream
GV-BX520D-0
Sub
Stream
4:3
2048 x 1536, 1600 x 1200,
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720,
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
2560 x 1920, 2048 x 1536,
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960,
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x
360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS, 3GPP/ISMA,
RTSP, PSIA, SNMP, QoS (DSCP)
Note: For GV-BX110D, HTTPS, SNMPT and QoS are only supported in
V1.08 or later.
359
Specifications: Box Camera
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
GV-BX110D
C / CS-Mount
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
CS Mount
GV-BX110D
No
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
Temperature Detector GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
Power
Connectors
Yes
GV-BX110D
DC Jack, PoE
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
2-pin terminal block, PoE
Ethernet
RJ-45
Audio
1 In (Using the built-in microphone or externally
connecting a microphone)
1 Out (Stereo phone jack, 3.5 mm / 0.14 in)
360
GV-BX110D (fixed lens)
GV-BX130D-1
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX520D-0
Auto Iris GV-BX110D (Varifocal)
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D-0
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
Connectors
Not functional
Yes
Local
Storage
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or above)
TV-Out
BNC connector (640 x 480 resolution)
Digital
I/O
GV-BX110D
5-pin terminal block, pitch
3.5 mm / 0.14 in
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
3-pin terminal block, pitch
2.5 mm / 0.1 in
GV-BX110D
1 LED with two colors
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
LED Indicator
GV-BX140DW
2 LEDs: Power, Status
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
Note: The TV-Out function only works in 640 x 480 resolution. For TV-Out
to work properly, you must set the video resolution to 1280 x 1024 or
lower. If both streams are enabled, the Sub Stream must be set to 640 x
480.
361
Specifications: Box Camera
General
Operating Temperature 0°C ~ 50°C / 32 °F ~ 122 °F
Humidity
Power Source
Max. Power
Consumption
Dimensions
(L X W X H)
Weight
Regulatory
10% to 90% (no condensation)
12V DC / PoE
GV-BX110D
9.2 W
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
7W
GV-BX110D
115 x 65 x 60 mm /
4.52 x 2.55 x 2.36 in
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
75.5 x75 x 54 mm /
2.97 x 2.95 x 2.13 in
(without lens)
GV-BX110D
450 g / 0.99 lb
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX140DW
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX520D-0
321 g / 0.71 lb
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
362
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet / PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span
PoE Power Output
Per Port 48V DC, 350mA. Max. 15.4 watts
Note: An STP cable can only work with a one-port PoE adapter.
Web Interface
Installation Management
Web-based configuration
Maintenance
Firmware upgrade through Web Browser or
Utility
Camera live view, video recording, change
video quality, bandwidth control, image
snapshot, digital I/O control, audio, Wide
Access from Web Browser
Angle Lens Dewarping, Picture in Picture,
Picture and Picture, Privacy Mask, Visual
Automation, Tampering Alarm, Text Overlay
Language
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch / English
/ French / German / Greek / Hebrew /
Hungarian / Indonesian / Italian /Japanese /
Lithuanian / Norwegian / Persian / Polish /
Portuguese / Romanian / Russian / Serbian
/ Simplified Chinese / Slovakian / Slovenian
/ Spanish / Thai / Traditional Chinese /
Turkish
Note: For GV-BX110D, the Wide Angle Lens Dewarping and Text
Overlay are only supported in V1.08 or later.
363
Specifications: Box Camera
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup Center,
GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GV-Eye
HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone and iPod
Touch, GV-GView for Windows PDA, GVMSView for Windows Smartphone, GVSSView for Symbian Smartphone, 3Genabled phone
Live Viewing
IE , GV-MultiView
CMS Server support
GV-Control Center, GV-Center V2, GV-VSM
Note: For GV-BX110D, the GV-Backup Center and GV-Recording Server
are only supported in V1.08 or later.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
364
Specifications: IR Arctic Box
Camera
Camera
Image
Sensor
Picture
Elements
GV-BX120D-E
1/3" progressive scan CMOS
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
1/2.5” progressive scan CMOS
GV-BX120D-E
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
GV-BX220D-E
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
GV-BX320D-E
2048 (H) x 1536 (V)
GV-BX520D-E
2560 (H) x 1920 (V)
GV-BX120D-E
Minimum
Illumination
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
Color
0.08 Lux at F/1.4
B/W
IR ON
0.04 Lux at F/1.4
0 Lux
Color
0.5 Lux at F/1.3
B/W
0.1 Lux at F/1.3
IR ON
0 Lux
Color
0.5 Lux at F/1.6
B/W
0.1 Lux at F/1.6
IR On
0 Lux
Shutter Speed
Automatic, Manual (1/5 ~ 1/8000 sec)
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800K ~ 8500K)
Gain Control
Automatic
365
Specifications: IR Arctic Box Camera
S/N Ratio
GV-BX120D-E
50 dB
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
45 dB
BLC
Yes
Lens
Megapixel
Yes
Day/Night
Yes (with removable IR-cut filter)
Lens Type
Focal
Length
Maximum
Aperture
Varifocal
GV-BX120D-E
2.8 ~ 12 mm
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
2.8 ~ 6 mm
GV-BX520D-E
4.5 ~ 10 mm
GV-BX120D-E
F/1.4
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
F/1.3
GV-BX520D-E
F/1.6
Mount
Image
Format
CS
GV-BX120D-E
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
1/3”
GV-BX520D-E
1/2’’
GV-BX120D-E
Angle of
View
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
Diagonal
115° ~ 45.3°
Horizontal
92°~ 27.2°
Vertical
69° ~ 20.4°
Diagonal
-
Horizontal
101.11° ~ 46.58°
Vertical
74.10° ~ 35.09°
Diagonal
102° ~ 47°
Horizontal
80.5°~ 37.12°
Vertical
60° ~ 28°
366
Focus
Manual (w/lock)
Zoom
Manual (w/lock)
Iris
GV-BX120D-E
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
DC drive
GV-BX520D-E
Manual
Operation
IR Quantity
4
IR Distance
15 m / 50 ft. (Max.)
Torque
(Focus/Zoom screws)
0.049 N.m
Operation
Video Compression
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
Video Stream
Stream 1 from H. 264 or MJPEG
Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
Frame Rate
GV-BX120D-E
30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-BX220D-E
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
GV-BX320D-E
20 fps at 2048 x 1536
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
GV-BX520D-E
10 fps at 2560 x 1920
Image Setting
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation,
Sharpness, Gamma, White Balance,
Flicker-less, Image Orientation, Shutter
Speed, D/N Sensitivity, Backlight
Compensation
Audio Compression
G.711, AAC (16 kHz / 16 bit)
Two-Way Audio
Yes
Note: The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the
number of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
367
Specifications: IR Arctic Box Camera
Video Resolution
Main
Stream
GV-BX120D-E
Sub
Stream
Main
Stream
GV-BX220D-E
Sub
Stream
Main
Stream
GV-BX320D-E
Sub
Stream
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960,
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720,
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
2048 x 1536, 1600 x 1200,
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720,
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
368
Main
Stream
GV-BX520D-E
Sub
Stream
4:3
2560 x 1920, 2048 x 1536,
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960,
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16 :9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x
360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16 :9 640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS, 3GPP/ISMA,
RTSP, PSIA, SNMP, QoS (DSCP)
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
CS Mount
Camera Angle Pan
Adjustment
Tilt
0° ~ 330°
Temperature Detector
Yes
Power
PoE
Ethernet
RJ-45
Audio
1 In (externally connecting a microphone)
1 Out (Stereo phone jack, 3.5 mm / 0.14
in)
TV-Out
BNC connector (640 x 480 resolution)
Connectors
369
0° ~ 90°
Specifications: IR Arctic Box Camera
LED Indicator
2 LEDs: Power, Status
Note: The TV-Out function only works in 640 x 480 resolution. For TV-Out
to work properly, you must set the video resolution to 1280 x 1024 or lower.
If both streams are enabled, the Sub Stream must be set to 640 x 480.
General
Operating Temperature
-40°C ~ 50°C / -40 °F ~ 122 °F
Humidity
10% to 90% (no condensation)
Power Source
PoE (IEEE 802.3at)
Max. Power Consumption
24 W
Dimensions
100.5 x 100.5 x 317.5 mm / 3.96 x 3.96 x 12.5
in
Weight
3.2 Kg / 7.11 lb
Regulatory
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
Protection Classification
IP66
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet / PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span
PoE Power Output
DC 48V, 600mA (34.2W Max.)
370
Web Interface
Installation Management
Web-based configuration
Maintenance
Firmware upgrade through Web Browser or
Utility
Camera live view, video recording, change
video quality, bandwidth control, image
snapshot, digital I/O control, audio, Wide
Access from Web Browser
Angle Lens Dewarping, Picture in Picture,
Picture and Picture, Privacy Mask, Visual
Automation, Tampering Alarm, Text Overlay
Language
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch / English
/ French / German / Greek / Hebrew /
Hungarian / Indonesian / Italian /Japanese /
Lithuanian / Norwegian / Persian / Polish /
Portuguese / Romanian / Russian / Serbian
/ Simplified Chinese / Slovakian / Slovenian
/ Spanish / Thai / Traditional Chinese /
Turkish
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup Center,
GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GV-Eye
HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone and iPod
Touch, GV-GView for Windows PDA, GVMSView for Windows Smartphone, GVSSView for Symbian Smartphone, 3Genabled phone
Live Viewing
IE , GV-MultiView
CMS Server support
GV-Control Center, GV-Center V2, GV-VSM
371
Specifications: IR Arctic Box Camera
Specifications: GV-PA481
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet / PSE
PoE Power Output (10/100
DC 48V, 1A (48W Max.)
Out)
Ethernet Cable Length
Max 100 m / 328 ft from GV-PA481 to IP
device, CAT5
Power Input
DC 48V, 1A
Operation Temperature
-0°C ~ 40°C / 32°F ~ 104°F
Dimensions (L x W x H)
138 x 104 x 38 mm / 5.43 x 4.09 x 1.5 in
Weight
610 g / 13.42 lbs
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
372
Specifications: Mini Fixed &
Rugged Dome
Camera
GV-MFD110
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
1/3" progressive scan CMOS
GV-MDR120
Image
Sensor
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR220
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
GV-MFD110
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
GV-MDR120
Picture
Elements
GV-MFD220
GV-MDR220
GV-MFD320
GV-MDR320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR520
373
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
2048 (H) x 1536 (V)
2560 (H) x 1920 (V)
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
GV-MFD110
Color
GV-MFD120
Color
GV-MDR120
B/W
Minimum
GV-MFD130
Illumination
GV-MFD220
1.5 Lux (1/60 sec), 0.2
Lux (1/5 sec), (F/1.8,
AGC-On, slow shutterOff)
0.08 Lux at F/1.5
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR220
Color
B/W
0.5 Lux at F/2.8
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
GV-MFD110
Shutter
Speed
Automatic (Balanced, Speed
Priority, Quality Priority),
Manual (1/5 ~ 1/4000 sec),
GV-MFD
(except GV-MFD110)
Automatic, Manual (1/5 ~
1/8000 sec)
GV-MDR
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800K ~
8500K)
Gain Control
Automatic
374
GV-MFD120
GV-MDR120
50 dB
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
S/N Ratio
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
45 dB
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
GV-MFD110
BLC
No
GV-MFD
(except GV-MFD110)
Yes
GV-MDR
Lens
Yes
Megapixel
GV-MFD110
Day/Night
No
GV-MFD
(except GV-MFD110)
Yes (electronic)
GV-MDR
Fixed
Iris
GV-MFD110
GV-MFD120
GV-MDR120
Focal Length
375
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
3.6 mm
4.05 mm
2.54 mm
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
GV-MDR220
Focal Length
GV-MDR320
2.54 mm
GV-MDR520
GV-MFD110
GV-MFD120
GV-MDR120
F/1.8
F/1.5
GV-MFD130
Maximum
Aperture
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
F/2.8
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
M12, Pitch 0.5 mm
Mount
GV-MFD110
GV-MFD120
1/3’’
GV-MDR120
GV-MFD130
Image Format
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
1/2.5’’
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
376
GV-MFD110
GV-MFD120
GV-MDR120
80.4° (D)
65.4° (H)
49.9° (V)
100.2°(D)
77°(H)
54°(V)
162.5°(D)
130.1°(H)
97.3°(V)
GV-MFD130
Angle of View
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
GV-MFD110
Yes
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
Focus
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
Operation
No
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR
Zoom
No
Iris
Fixed
Note: For GV-MFD (except GV-MFD110), the day/night function is only
supported by V1.07 or later.
377
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
Operation
Video Compression
GV-MFD110
H.264, MJPEG, MPEG4
Dual Streams from two of H.264,
MPEG4 or MJPEG
GV-MFD120
Video Stream
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR120
Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG
Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or
MJPEG
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
GV-MFD110
Frame Rate
15 fps at 1280 x 1024
30 fps at 640 x 512
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-MDR120
GV-MFD220
GVMDR220
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
GV-MFD320
Frame Rate
GVMDR320
20 fps at 2048 x 1536
GV-MFD520
GVMDR520
Image Setting
10 fps at 2560 x 1920
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation,
Sharpness, Gamma, White Balance,
Flicker-less 50/60 Hz, Image
Orientation, Shutter Speed, Backlight
Compensation, D/N sensitivity
378
GV-MFD110
G.711
GV-MFD120
Audio
Compression
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
G.711, AAC (16 kHz / 16 bit)
GV-MDR120
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
Sensor Input
No
Alarm Output
No
Note:
1. The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the number of
connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
2. AAC is not available for GV-MFD110 and is only supported by GVSystem V8.5 or later.
3. Backlight Compensation is not supported in GV-MFD110.
Video Resolution
Main
Stream
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
Sub
Stream
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
GV-MFD110
379
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
GV-MFD120
Main
Stream
GV-MFD130
GV-MDR120
Sub
Stream
Main
Stream
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960, 640 x 480,
320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
GV-MFD220
GV-MDR220
Sub
Stream
4:3
Main
Stream
Sub
Stream
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
GV-MFD320
GV-MDR320
2048 x 1536, 1600 x 1200,
380
Main
Stream
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR520
Sub
Stream
4:3
2560 x 1920, 2048 x 1536, 1600 x
1200, 1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x
240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
Protocol
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS, 3GPP/ISMA,
RTSP, PSIA, SNMP, QoS (DSCP)
Note: For GV-MFD110, HTTPS, SNMP and QoS are only supported in
V1.08 or later.
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
M12, Pitch 0.5 mm
GV-MFD
Camera
Angle
Adjustment
381
GV-MDR
Pan
-45° ~ +45°
Tilt
0° ~ 90°
Pan
-45° ~ +45°
Tilt
0° ~ 90°
Rotate
0° ~ 360°
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
GV-MFD110
Temperature
Detector
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
No
Yes
GV-MDR
GV-MFD110
GV-MDR
Power
Connectors
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
PoE
PoE,
3-pin terminal block
Ethernet
RJ-45
Audio
Built-in microphone
Local
Storage
GV-MFD110
None
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
Micro SD / SDHC
memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or
above)
GV-MDR
GV-MFD110
LED Indicator
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
None
4 LEDs: Link, ACT,
Power, Status
GV-MDR
382
General
Operating
Temperature
GV-MFD
0°C ~ 50°C / 32°F ~ 122°F
GV-MDR
-20°C ~ 50°C / -4°F ~ 122°F
10% - 90% (no condensation)
Humidity
GV-MFD110
GV-MDR
Power
Source
GV-MFD
(all except GV-MFD110)
PoE
PoE, DC 12V
GV-MFD110
5.8 W
GV-MFD120
4.5 W
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
5.5 W
Max. Power
GV-MFD320
Consumption
GV-MFD520
6W
GV-MDR120
3W
GV-MDR220
3.4 W
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
383
3.6 W
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
GV-MFD
Dimensions
GV-MDR
Weight
Camera Body
ø 106 x 55.6 mm
4.2 x 2.2 in
Cable Length
1 m / 3.28 ft
Cable
Diameter
ø 8 mm / 0.31 in
Max.
Connector
Diameter
ø 28.5 mm
ø 1.12 in
Camera Body
ø 115 x 59.2 mm
ø 4.5 x 2.3 in
Cable Length
1.054 m / 41.5 in
Cable
Diameter
ø 6.2 mm / 0.24 in
Connector
Diameter
ø 30 mm / 1.18 in
GV-MFD110
212 g / 0.47 lb
GV-MFD120
275 g / 0.61 lb
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
280 g / 0.62 lb
GV-MFD520
Protection
Classification
GV-MDR
568 g / 1.3 lb
GV-MDR
IP66
Vandal Resistance
(GV-MDR only)
Regulatory
IK7
GV-MFD
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
GV-MDR
CE, FCC, C-Tick, EN50155, RoHS
compliant
384
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span and Mid-Span
PoE Power Output
Per Port 48V DC, 350 mA. Max. 15.4
watts
Web Interface
Installation Management
Maintenance
Access from Web Browser
Language
Web-based configuration
Firmware upgrade through Web Browser
or Utility
Camera live view, video recording,
change video quality, zoom in/out,
bandwidth control, image snapshot,
audio, Wide Angle Lens Dewarping,
Picture in Picture, Picture and Picture,
Privacy Mask, Text Overlay
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch /
English / French / German / Greek /
Hebrew / Hungarian / Indonesian / Italian
/Japanese / Lithuanian / Norwegian /
Persian / Polish / Portuguese / Romanian
/ Russian / Serbian / Simplified Chinese /
Slovakian / Slovenian / Spanish / Thai /
Traditional Chinese / Turkish
Note: For GV-MFD110, Wide Angle Lens Dewarping and Text Overlay are
only supported in V1.08 or later.
385
Specifications: Mini Fixed & Rugged Dome
Applications
Network Storage
Mobile Phone support
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup
Center, GV-Recording Server
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GVEye HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone and
iPod Touch, GV-GView for Windows
PDA, GV-MSView for Windows
Smartphone, GV-SSView for Symbian
Smartphone, 3G-enabled phone
Live Viewing
IE , Mobile Phone
CMS Server support
GV-Control Center, GV-Center V2,
GV-VSM
Note: For GV-MFD110, GV-Backup Center and GV-Recording Server are
only supported in V1.08 or later.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
386
Specifications: Bullet Camera
:
Camera
GV-BL110D
GV-BL120D
Image Sensor
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
Picture Elements
Color
Minimum
Illumination
B/W
IR ON
387
1/3" progressive scan CMOS
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS
GV-BL110D
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
GV-BL220D
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
GV-BL320D
2048 (H) x 1536 (V)
GV-BL110D
1 Lux (1/60 sec), 0.1 Lux (1/5
sec), (F/1.3, AGC-On, slow
shutter-Off)
GV-BL120D
0.15 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.08 Lux
(1/5 sec)
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
1 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.5 Lux (1/5
sec)
GV-BL110D
0 Lux (1/60 sec), (F/1.4, AGCOn, slow shutter-Off)
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
0 Lux
Specifications: Bullet Camera
Shutter Speed
GV-BL110D
Automatic (Balanced, Speed
Priority, Quality Priority), Manual
(1/5 ~ 1/4000 sec),
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
Automatic, Manual (1/5 ~
1/8000 sec)
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800K ~ 8500K)
Gain Control
Automatic
S/N Ratio
GV-BL120D
50 dB
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
GV-BL520D
45 dB
Lens
Megapixel
Yes
Day / Night
Yes (with removable IR-cut
filter)
Lens Type
Varifocal
Focal Length
3.6 ~ 9 mm
Maximum Aperture
F/1.3
Mount
ø 14 mm
Image Format
1/3’’
Diagonal
GV-BL110D Horizontal
Angle of
View
93° (W) ~ 38° (T)
73° (W) ~ 30.4° (T)
Vertical
56.6° (W) ~ 23° (T)
Diagonal
94.5° (W) ~ 38.2° (T)
GV-BL120D Horizontal
Vertical
73.9° (W) ~ 29.8° (T)
59° (W) ~ 23.9° (T)
388
Angle of
View
Diagonal
GV-BL130D
Horizontal
GV-BL220D
Vertical
Diagonal
GV-BL320D Horizontal
Vertical
Operation
76° (W) ~ 32° (T)
66° (W) ~ 27.9° (T)
37.3° (W) ~ 15.7° (T)
88.8° (W) ~ 36.3° (T)
71° (W) ~ 29° (T)
53.3° (W) ~ 21.8° (T)
Focus
Manual (w/lock)
Zoom
Manual (w/lock)
Iris
DC drive
IR LED Quantity
16 IR LEDs
IR Distance
15 m / 50 ft (Max.)
Torque (Zoom / Focus Screws)
3.9 ~ 4.9 N.cm
Operation
Video Compression
Video
Stream
Frame Rate
GV-BL110D
Dual streams from H.264, MPEG4, or
MJPEG
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG
Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
GV-BL110D
15 fps at 1280 x 1024
30 fps at 640 x 512
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
GV-BL320D
389
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
30 fps at 1280 x 1024
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
20 fps at 2048 x 1536
Specifications: Bullet Camera
Image Setting
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation,
Sharpness, Gamma, White Balance,
Flicker-less, Image Orientation, Shutter
Speed, D/N Sensitivity, Backlight
Compensation
Audio Compression
G.711, AAC (16 kHz / 16 bit)
Two-Way Audio
Yes
Sensor Input
1 Input (Dry Contact)
Alarm Output
1 Output (200mA 5V DC)
Note:
1.
The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the
number of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
2.
Backlight Compensation and D/N Sensitivity are not supported in
GV-BL110D.
3.
AAC is not available for GV-BL110D and is only supported by GVSystem V8.5 or later.
Video Resolution
GV-BL110D
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
Main
Stream
4:3
5:4
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
Sub
Stream
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
Main
Stream
5:4
4:3
16:9
5:4
4:3
640 x 512, 320 x 256
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
640 x 480, 320 x 240
Sub
Stream
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
390
4:3
Main
Stream
GV-BL220D
Sub
Stream
Main
Stream
GV-BL320D
Sub
Stream
16:9
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960, 640 x 480,
320 x 240
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
2048 x 1536, 1600 x 1200, 1280 x
960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS,
3GPP/ISMA, RTSP, PSIA, SNMP, QoS
(DSCP)
Note: For GV-BL110D, HTTPS, SNMP and QoS are only supported in
V1.08 or later.
391
Specifications: Bullet Camera
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
ø 14 mm
Pan
Camera Angle
Tilt
Adjustment
Rotate
Temperature Detector
90° ~ 180°
0° ~ 360°
Yes
Power
3-pin terminal block, PoE
Ethernet
Digital I/O
RJ-45
1 In (RCA female for microphone)
1 Out (RCA female for speaker)
I/O Wire
Auto Iris
DC Drive
Local
Storage
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or above)
TV-Out
No
Audio
Connectors
0° ~ 360°
General
Operating Temperature
-20°C ~ 50°C / -4 °F ~ 122 °F
Humidity
10% to 90% (no condensation)
Power Source
12V DC / 24V AC / PoE
Max. Power Consumption
Camera Body
Dimensions
Weight
Cable Length
Max. Cable
Diameter
Max.
Connector
Diameter
12 W
277.5 x 87.75 x 148.95 mm
10.9 x 3.45 x 5.86 in
1 m / 3.28 ft
ø 7.1 mm / 0.28 in
ø 25.2 mm / 0.99 in
1.35 kg / 2.98 lb
392
Protection Classification
IP66
Regulatory
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet / PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span
PoE Power Output
Per Port 48V DC, 350mA. Max. 15.4 watts
Web Interface
Installation Management
Web-based configuration
Maintenance
Firmware upgrade through Web Browser
or Utility
Camera live view, video recording, change
video quality, bandwidth control, image
snapshot, digital I/O control, audio, Wide
Access from Web Browser Angle Lens Dewarping, Picture in Picture,
Picture and Picture, Privacy Mask, Visual
Automation, Tampering Alarm, Text
Overlay
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch /
English / French / German / Greek /
Hebrew / Hungarian / Indonesian / Italian
Language
/Japanese / Lithuanian / Norwegian /
Persian / Polish / Portuguese / Romanian /
Russian / Serbian / Simplified Chinese /
Slovakian / Slovenian / Spanish / Thai /
Traditional Chinese / Turkish
Note: For GV-BL110D, Wide Angle Lens Dewarping and Text Overlay are
only supported in V1.08 or later.
393
Specifications: Bullet Camera
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup Center,
GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GVEye HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone and
iPod Touch, GV-GView for Windows PDA,
GV-MSView for Windows Smartphone,
GV-SSView for Symbian Smartphone, 3Genabled phone
Live Viewing
IE , Mobile Phone
CMS Server support
GV-Control Center, GV-Center V2,
GV-VSM
Note: For GV-BL110D, GV-Backup Center and GV-Recording Server are
only supported in V1.08 or later.
All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
394
Specifications: PTZ Camera
Camera
Model Name
GV-PTZ010D-N
Image Sensor
1/4" CCD image sensor
Picture Elements
704 (H) x 480 (V)
Minimum
Illumination
Color
2.5 Lux at F/1.8
B/W
0.07 Lux at F/1.8
GV-PTZ010D-P
704 (H) x 576 (V)
Shutter Speed
Automatic,
Manual (1/60 ~
1/120,000 sec)
Automatic,
Manual (1/50 ~
1/120,000 sec)
White Balance
Manual (3200K ~ 9600K)
Gain Control
Automatic
Lens
Day/Night
Yes (electronic)
Focal Length
4.2 ~ 42 mm
Maximum Aperture
F/1.8 ~ F/2.9
Image Format
Angle of
View
Operation
395
1/4’’
Diagonal
56.4°
Horizontal
46.4°
Vertical
35.6°
Focus
Auto Focus
Zoom
100x (10x Optical, 10x Digital)
Iris
Fixed
Specifications: PTZ Camera
Operation
Model Name
GV-PTZ010D-N
GV-PTZ010D-P
Video Format
NTSC
PAL
Video Compression
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
Video Stream
Video
Resolution
Main Stream
Sub Stream
Frame Rate
Dual Streams from two of H.264,
MPEG4 or MJPEG
704 x 480
704 x 576
704 x 240
704 x 288
352 x 240
352 x 288
704 x 480
704 x 576
704 x 240
704 x 288
352 x 240
352 x 288
30 fps
25 fps
Image Setting
Exposure Control, White Balance,
Image Orientation, Backlight
Compensation, Gamma
Audio Compression
G.711
Two-Way Audio
Yes
Sensor Input
1 Input (Dry Contact)
Alarm Output
1 Output (200mA 5V DC)
Note: The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the
number of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP,
FTP, DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS,
3GPP/ISMA, RTSP, PSIA, SNMP,
QoS (DSCP)
Note: HTTPS, SNMP and QoS are only supported in V1.08 or later.
396
Mechanical
Camera Angle Pan
Adjustment
Tilt
-175° ~ 175°
Temperature Detector
Yes
Connectors
-45° ~ 90°
Power
2-pin terminal block, PoE
Ethernet
RJ-45
Audio
1 In (Using a built-in or an externally
connected microphone)
1 Out (Stereo phone jack, 3.5 mm /
0.14 in)
Digital I/O
3-pin terminal block
(pitch 2.5 mm / 0.1 in)
Local Storage
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or above)
LED Indicator
2 LEDs: Power and Status
General
Operating Temperature
-10°C ~ 50°C / 14 °F ~ 122 °F
Humidity
10% to 90% (no condensation)
Power Source
12V DC / 24V AC / PoE
Max. Power Consumption
With mounting
base and cover
Dimensions
(L x W x H) Without
mounting base
and cover
12 W
167.75 x 166.78 x 135.2 mm /
6.6 x 6.57 x 5.32 in
124.55 x 122.73 x 133.3 mm /
4.9 x 4.83 x 5.25 in
Weight
490 g / 1.08 lb
Regulatory
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
397
Specifications: PTZ Camera
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet /
PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span
PoE Power Output
Per Port 48V DC, 350mA. Max. 15.4
watts
Web Interface
Installation Management
Web-based configuration
Maintenance
Firmware upgrade through Web
Browser or Utility
Access from Web Browser
Camera live view, video recording,
change video quality, bandwidth
control, image snapshot, audio, Wide
Angle Lens Dewarping, Picture in
Picture, Picture and Picture, Privacy
Mask, Text Overlay
Language
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch /
English / French / German / Greek /
Hebrew / Hungarian / Indonesian /
Italian /Japanese / Lithuanian /
Norwegian / Persian / Polish /
Portuguese / Romanian / Russian /
Serbian / Simplified Chinese /
Slovakian / Slovenian / Spanish / Thai /
Traditional Chinese / Turkish
Note: Wide Angle Lens Dewarping and Text Overlay are only supported in
V1.08 or later.
398
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup
Center, GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone,
GV-Eye HD for iPad, GV-Eye for
iPhone and iPod Touch, GV-GView for
Windows PDA, GV-MSView for
Windows Smartphone, GV-SSView for
Symbian Smartphone, 3G-enabled
phone
Live Viewing
IE , Mobile Phone
CMS Server support
GV-Center V2, GV-VSM, GV-Control
Center
Note: GV-Backup Center and GV-Recording Server are only supported in
V1.08 or later.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
399
Specifications: PT Camera
Specifications: PT Camera
Camera
Image Sensor
1/3" progressive scan CMOS
Picture Elements
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
1.5 Lux (1/60 sec)
Minimum
Illumination
Color
0.2 Lux (1/5 sec) (F1.5, AGC-On, slow
shutter-Off)
B/W
0 Lux (1/60 sec) (F/1.5, AGC-On, slow
shutter-Off)
IR ON
Shutter Speed
Automatic (Balanced, Speed Priority,
Quality Priority), Manual (1/5 ~ 1/4000
sec)
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800K ~ 8500K)
Gain Control
Automatic
Lens
Megapixel
Yes
Day/Night
Yes (with removable IR-cut filter)
Iris
Fixed
Focal Length
4.0 mm
Maximum Aperture
F/1.5
Lens Mounting
M12, Pitch 0.5 mm
Image Format
1/3’’
Angle of
View
Diagonal
89°
Horizontal
71.2°
Vertical
50°
400
Operation
Focus
Manual (w/lock)
Zoom
No
Iris
Fixed
IR LED Quantity
14 IR LEDs
IR Distance
15 m / 50 ft (Max.)
Operation
Video Compression
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
Video Stream
Dual Streams from two of H.264,
MPEG4 or MJPEG
Video
Resolution
Main
Stream
Sub
Stream
Frame Rate
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320x 240
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320x 240
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
15 fps at 1280 x 1024
30 fps at 640 x 480
Image Settings
Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness,
Saturation, Gamma, White Balance,
Flicker-less, Image Orientation, Shutter
Speed
Audio Compression
G.711
Two-Way Audio
Yes
Sensor Input
1 Input (Dry Contact)
Alarm Output
1 Output (200mA 5V DC)
Note: The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the
number of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
401
Specifications: PT Camera
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS,
3GPP/ISMA, RTSP, PSIA, SNMP,
QoS (DSCP)
Note: HTTPS, SNMP and QoS are only suppported in V1.08 or later.
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
M12, Pitch 0.5 mm
Camera Angle Pan
-175° ~ 175°
Adjustment
Tilt
Temperature Detector
Yes
Power
2-pin terminal block, PoE
Ethernet
RJ-45
Audio
1 In (Using a built-in or an externally
connected microphone)
1 Out (Stereo phone jack, 3.5 mm / 0.14
in)
Connectors
Local Storage
Digital I/O
LED Indicator
-45° ~ 90°
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or above)
3-pin terminal block
(pitch 2.5 mm / 0.1 in)
2 LEDs: Power and Status
402
General
Operating Temperature
-10°C ~ 50°C / 14°F ~ 122°F
Humidity
10% to 90% (no condensation)
Power Source
12V DC / 24V AC / PoE
Max. Power Consumption
12 W
With mounting
base and cover
Dimensions
(L x W x H) Without
mounting base
and cover
167.75 x 166.78 x 135.2 mm /
6.6 x 6.57 x 5.32 in
124.55 x 122.73 x 133.3 mm /
4.9 x 4.83 x 5.25 in
Weight
440 g / 0.97 lb
Regulatory
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet /
PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span
PoE Power Output
Per Port 48V DC, 350mA. Max. 15.4
watts
Web Interface
Installation Management
Web-based configuration
Maintenance
Firmware upgrade through Web
Browser or Utility
Access from Web Browser
Camera live view, video recording,
change video quality, bandwidth control,
image snapshot, digital I/O control,
audio, Wide Angle Lens Dewarping,
Picture in Picture, Picture and Picture,
Privacy Mask, Text Overlay
403
Specifications: PT Camera
Language
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch /
English / French / German / Greek /
Hebrew / Hungarian / Indonesian /
Italian /Japanese / Lithuanian /
Norwegian / Persian / Polish /
Portuguese / Romanian / Russian /
Serbian / Simplified Chinese / Slovakian
/ Slovenian / Spanish / Thai / Traditional
Chinese / Turkish
Note: Wide Angle Lens Dewarping and Text Overlay are only suppported
in V1.08 or later.
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup
Center, GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GVEye HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone
and iPod Touch, GV-GView for
Windows PDA, GV-MSView for
Windows Smartphone, GV-SSView for
Symbian Smartphone, 3G-enabled
phone
Live Viewing
IE , Mobile Phone
CMS Server support
GV-Center V2, GV-VSM, GV-Control
Center
Note: GV-Backup Center and GV-Recording Server are only suppported
in V1.08 or later.
All specifications are subject to change without notice.
404
Specifications: Vandal Proof IP
Dome
Camera
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
1/3" progressive scan CMOS
GV-VD220D
Image
Sensor
GV-VD221D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
GV-VD320D
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
Picture
Elements
GV-VD123D
GV-VD220D
GV-VD221D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
405
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
Specifications: Vandal Proof IP Dome
GV-VD320D
Picture
Elements
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
2048 (H) x 1536 (V)
Color
0.15 Lux (1/30 sec),
0.08 Lux (1/5 sec)
B/W
IR ON
0 Lux
Color
1 Lux (1/30 sec),
0.5 Lux (1/5 sec)
GV-VD220D
Minimum
Illumination
GV-VD221D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
B/W
IR ON
0 Lux
GV-VD323D
Shutter Speed
Automatic, Manual (1/5 ~ 1/8000 sec)
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800K ~ 8500K)
Gain Control
Automatic
S/N Ratio
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
GV-VD220D
GV-VD221D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
50 dB
45 dB
406
Lens
Megapixel
Yes
Day/Night
Yes (with removable IR-cut filter)
Lens Type
Varifocal
Focal Length
2.7 ~ 9 mm
Maximum Aperture
F/1.3
Mount
ø 14 mm
Angle of
View
Operation
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
Diagonal
126° (W) ~ 38.2° (T)
Horizontal
98.5° (W) ~ 29.8° (T)
Vertical
78.7° (W) ~ 23.9° (T)
GV-VD220D
GV-VD221D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
Diagonal
101° (W) ~ 32° (T)
Vertical
49.7° (W) ~ 15.7° (T)
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
Diagonal
118.4° (W) ~ 36.3° (T)
Horizontal
94.7° (W) ~ 29° (T)
Vertical
71.1° (W) ~ 21.8° (T)
Focus
Manual (w/lock)
Zoom
Manual (w/lock)
Iris
Horizontal
88° (W) ~ 27.9° (T)
DC drive
IR LED Quantity
15 IR LEDs
IR Distance
15 m / 50 ft (Max.)
Torque (Focus / Zoom
Screws)
3.9 ~ 4.9 N.cm
407
Specifications: Vandal Proof IP Dome
Operation
Video Compression
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
Video Stream
Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG
Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-VD123D
GV-VD220D
Frame
GV-VD221D
Rate
GV-VD222D
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
GV-VD223D
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
20 fps at 2048 x 1536
GV-VD323D
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Sharpness,
Image Setting
Gamma, White Balance, Flicker-less, Image
Orientation, Backlight Compensation, D/N
Sensitivity, Shutter Speed
Audio Compression
G.711, AAC (16 kHz / 16 bit)
Two-Way Audio
Yes
Sensor Input
1 Input (Dry Contact)
Alarm Output
1 Output (200mA 5V DC)
Note:
1. The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the number
of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
2. AAC is only supported by GV-System V8.5 and later.
408
Video Resolution
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
GV-VD220D
GV-VD221D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
Main Stream
Sub Stream
Main Stream
Sub Stream
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
Main Stream
Sub Stream
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960, 640 x 480,
320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
2048 x 1536, 1600 x 1200,
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS, 3GPP/ISMA,
RTSP, PSIA, SNMP, QoS (DSCP)
409
Specifications: Vandal Proof IP Dome
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
Camera
Angle
Adjustment
ø 14 mm
Pan
0° ~ 350°
Tilt
10° ~ 90°
Rotate
Temperature Detector
Connectors
0° ~ 340°
Yes
Power
3-pin terminal block, PoE
Ethernet
RJ-45
Audio
1 In (RCA female for microphone)
1 Out (RCA female for speaker)
Digital I/O
I/O Wires
Auto Iris
DC Drive
Local Storage
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or above)
TV-Out
LED Indicator
BNC connector (640 x 480 resolution)
2 LEDs: Power, Status
Note: The TV-Out function only works in 640 x 480 resolution. For TV-Out to
work properly, you must set the video resolution to 1280 x 1024 or lower. If
both streams are enabled, the Sub Stream must be set to 640 x 480.
General
Operating Temperature
-20°C ~ 50°C / -4 °F ~ 122 °F
Humidity
10% to 90% (no condensation)
Power Source
12V DC / 24V AC / PoE
Max. Power Consumption
12 W
410
Dimensions
Camera Body
ø 165 x 125 mm / 6.49 x 4.92 in
Cable Length
1 m / 3.28 ft
Cable Diameter
ø 16.7 mm / 0.66 in
Max. Connector
Diameter
ø 16.7 mm / 0.66 in
Weight
1.7 kg / 3.75 lb
Protection Classification
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD220D
GV-VD221D
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
Vandal
Resistance GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
Regulatory
IP66
IK10+
IK7
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet / PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span
PoE Power Output
Per Port 48V DC, 350mA. Max. 15.4 watts
Web Interface
Installation Management
Web-based configuration
Maintenance
Firmware upgrade through Web Browser or
Utility
411
Specifications: Vandal Proof IP Dome
Access from Web Browser
Camera live view, video recording, change
video quality, bandwidth control, image
snapshot, digital I/O control, audio, Wide
Angle Lens Dewarping, Picture in Picture,
Picture and Picture, Privacy Mask, Visual
Automation, Tampering Alarm, Text Overlay
Language
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch / English
/ French / German / Greek / Hebrew /
Hungarian / Indonesian / Italian /Japanese /
Lithuanian / Norwegian / Persian / Polish /
Portuguese / Romanian / Russian / Serbian
/ Simplified Chinese / Slovakian / Slovenian
/ Spanish / Thai / Traditional Chinese /
Turkish
Note: The text overlay function is only supported in V1.05 or later.
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup Center,
GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GVEye HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone and
iPod Touch, GV-GView for Windows PDA,
GV-MSView for Windows Smartphone,
GV-SSView for Symbian Smartphone, 3Genabled phone
Live Viewing
IE , Mobile Phone
CMS Server support
GV-Control Center, GV-Center V2,
GV-VSM
Note: GV-Backup Center, GV-Video Gateway and GV-Recording Server
are only supported for V1.03 or later.
All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
412
Specifications: Fixed IP Dome
Camera
GV-FD120D
Image
Sensor
GV-FD220D
GV-FD320D
Picture
Elements
1/3" progressive scan CMOS
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS
GV-FD120D
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
GV-FD220D
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
GV-FD320D
2048 (H) x 1536 (V)
GV-FD120D
Minimum
Illumination
GV-FD220D
GV-FD320D
Color
0.15 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.08 Lux (1/5
sec)
B/W
IR ON
0 Lux
Color
1 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.5 Lux (1/5
sec)
B/W
IR ON
0 Lux
Shutter Speed
Automatic, Manual (1/5 ~ 1/8000 sec)
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800K ~ 8500K)
Gain Control
Automatic
S/N Ratio
413
GV-FD120D
50 dB
GV-FD220D
GV-FD320D
45 dB
Specifications: Fixed IP Dome
Lens
Megapixel
Yes
Day/Night
Yes (with removable IR-cut filter)
Lens Type
Varifocal
Focal Length
2.7 ~ 9 mm
Maximum Aperture
F/1.3 ± 5%
Mount
ø 14 mm
Image Format
1/3’’
GV-FD120D
Angle of
View
GV-FD220D
GV-FD320D
Diagonal
126° (W) ~ 38.2° (T)
Horizontal
98.5° (W) ~ 29.8° (T)
Vertical
78.7° (W) ~ 23.9° (T)
Diagonal
101° (W) ~ 32° (T)
Horizontal
88° (W) ~ 27.9° (T)
Vertical
49.7° (W) ~ 15.7° (T)
Focus
Manual (w/lock)
Operation Zoom
Manual (w/lock)
Iris
DC drive
IR LED Quantity
15 IR LEDs
IR Distance
15 m / 50 ft (Max.)
Torque (Focus / Zoom
Screws)
3.9 ~ 4.9 N.cm
Operation
Video Compression
Video Stream
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG
Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
414
Frame
Rate
GV-FD120D
30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-FD220D
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
GV-FD320D
20 fps at 2048 x 1536
Image Setting
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation,
Sharpness, Gamma, White Balance,
Flicker-less, Image Orientation, Shutter
Speed, Backlight Compensation, D/N
Sensitivity
Audio Compression
G.711, AAC (16 k / 16 bit)
Two-Way Audio
Yes
Sensor Input
1 Input (Dry Contact)
Alarm Output
1 Output (200mA 5V DC)
Note:
3. The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the number
of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
4.
AAC is only supported by GV-System V8.5 or later.
Video Resolution
4:3
Main
Stream
GV-FD120D
Sub
Stream
415
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Specifications: Fixed IP Dome
4:3
GV-FD220D
Main
Stream
16:9
5:4
GV-FD220D
Sub
Stream
GV-FD320D
Sub
Stream
320 x 240
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
Main
Stream
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960, 640 x 480,
16:9
2048 x 1536, 1600 x 1200,
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS, 3GPP/ISMA,
RTSP, PSIA, SNMP, QoS (DSCP)
416
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
Camera Angle
Adjustment
ø 14 mm
Pan
0° ~ 350°
Tilt
10° ~ 90°
Rotate
Temperatire Detector
Connectors
0° ~ 340°
Yes
Power
2-pin terminal block, PoE
Ethernet
Ethernet (10/100 Base-T), RJ-45
Audio
1 In (microphone phone jack, 3.5 mm / 0.14
in)
1 Out (Stereo pohone jack, 3.5 mm / 0.14 in)
Digital I/O 3-pin terminal block, pitch 2.5 mm / 0.1 in
Auto Iris
DC Drive
Local
Storage
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or above)
TV-Out
BNC connector (640 x 480 resolution)
LED Indicator
2 LEDs: Power, Status
Note: The TV-Out function only works in 640 x 480 resolution. For TV-Out
to work properly, you must set the video resolution to 1280 x 1024 or lower.
If both streams are enabled, the Sub Stream must be set to 640 x 480.
General
Operating Temperature
0°C ~ 50°C / 32 °F ~ 122 °F
Humidity
10% to 90% (no condensation)
Power Source
12V DC / 24V AC / PoE
Max. Power Consumption
12 W
Dimensions (L X W X H)
155 x 110 mm / 6.1 x 4.33 in
Weight
580 g / 1.28 lb
Regulatory
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
417
Specifications: Fixed IP Dome
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet / PSE
PoE Power Supply Type
End-Span
PoE Power Output
Per Port 48V DC, 350mA. Max. 15.4 watts
Web Interface
Installation Management
Maintenance
Web-based configuration
Firmware upgrade through Web Browser
or Utility
Camera live view, video recording, change
video quality, bandwidth control, image
snapshot, digital I/O control, audio, Wide
Access from Web Browser
Angle Lens Dewarping, Picture in Picture,
Picture and Picture, Privacy Mask, Visual
Automation, Tampering Alarm, Text
Overlay
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch /
English / French / German / Greek /
Hebrew / Hungarian / Indonesian / Italian
Language
/Japanese / Lithuanian / Norwegian /
Persian / Polish / Portuguese / Romanian /
Russian / Serbian / Simplified Chinese /
Slovakian / Slovenian / Spanish / Thai /
Traditional Chinese / Turkish
Note: The text overlay function is only supported in V1.05 or later.
418
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup Center,
GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GVEye HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone and
iPod Touch, GV-GView for Windows PDA,
GV-MSView for Windows Smartphone, GVSSView for Symbian Smartphone, 3Genabled phone
Live Viewing
IE , Mobile Phone
CMS Server support
GV-Control Center, GV-Center V2,
GV-VSM
Note: For the GV-Backup Center and GV-Recording Server supported
firmware versions, please see Appendix D.
All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
419
Specifications: Cube & Wireless Cube Camera
Specifications: Cube Camera &
Wireless Cube Camera
Camera
Image Sensor
Picture
Elements
Minimum
Illumination
1/2.5’’ progressive scan CMOS
GV-CB120
GV-CBW120
1280 (H) x 1024 (V)
GV-CB220
GV-CBW220
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)
Color
1 Lux (1/30 sec), 0.5 Lux (1/5 sec)
Shutter Speed
Automatic, Manual (1/5 ~ 1/8000 sec)
White Balance
Automatic, Manual (2800 ~ 8500K)
Gain Control
S/N Ratio
Automatic
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
45 dB
Lens
Megapixel
Yes
Day/Night
Yes (electronic)
Lens Type
Fixed
Focal Length
3.35 mm
Maximum Aperture
F/2.4
420
Mount
M12 mm
Image Format
1/3’’
Angle of
View
Diagonal
142°
Horizontal
131°
Vertical
112°
Operation
Video Compression
H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG
Video Stream
Stream 1 from H.264 or MJPEG
Stream 2 from H.264, MPEG4 or MJPEG
Frame Rate
GV-CB120
GV-CBW120
30 fps at 1280 x 1024
GV-CB220
GV-CBW220
30 fps at 1920 x 1080
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation,
Image Setting
Sharpness, Gamma, White Balance,
Flicker-less, Image Orientation, Shutter
Speed, Backlight Compensation
Audio Compression
G.711, AAC (16 kHz / 16 bit)
Two-Way Audio
Yes
Note:
1.
The frame rate and performance may vary depending on the
number of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
2.
421
AAC is only supported by GV-System V8.5 or later.
Specifications: Cube & Wireless Cube Camera
Video Resolution
Main Stream
GV-CB120
GV-CBW120
Sub Stream
Main Stream
GV-CB220
GV-CBW220
Sub Stream
4:3
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960, 640 x 480,
320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 640 x 360,
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024, 640 x 512, 320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480, 320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360, 448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512, 320 x 256
Network
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Protocol
HTTP, HTTPS, TCP, UDP, SMTP, FTP,
DHCP, NTP, UPnP, DynDNS, 3GPP/ISMA,
RTSP, PSIA, SNMP, QoS (DSCP)
Network (for GV-CBW120 / 220 only)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Antenna Type
Bulit-in
Security
WEP, WPA-PSK(TKIP), WPA-PSK(AES),
WPA2-PSK(TKIP), WPA2-PSK(AES)
Note: The signal range and data throughput may vary depending on the
network conditions and environmental factors.
422
Mechanical
Lens Mounting
M12 mm
Temperature Detector
Yes
Connectors
Power
DC Jack
Ethernet
Ethernet (10/100 Base-T), RJ-45
Audio
Built-in speaker & microphone
Local
Storage
Micro SD / SDHC memory card slot
(for Class 6 card or above)
LED Indicator
2 LEDs: Status, LAN
General
Operating
Temperature
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
0°C ~ 50°C / 32°F ~ 122°F
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
0°C ~ 40°C / 32°F ~ 104°F
Humidity
Power
Source
10% to 90% (no condensation)
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
5V DC or 12V DC
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
5V DC
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
3.2 W (for 5V DC)
4 W (for 12V DC)
Max. Power
Consumption GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
Dimensions (L X W X H)
Weight
Regulatory
423
3.2 W
60 x 84.8 x 39 mm / 2.36 x 3.34 x 1.54 in
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
80 g / 0.18 lb
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
70 g / 0.15 lb
CE, FCC, C-Tick, RoHS compliant
Specifications: Cube & Wireless Cube Camera
Web Interface
Installation Management
Maintenance
Access from Web
Browser
Language
Web-based configuration
Firmware upgrade through Web Browser or
Utility
Camera live view, video recording, change
video quality, bandwidth control, image
snapshot, , audio, Wide Angle Lens
Dewarping, Picture in Picture, Picture and
Picture, Privacy Mask, Tampering Alarm,
Text Overlay
Bulgarian / Czech / Danish / Dutch / English /
French / German / Greek / Hebrew /
Hungarian / Indonesian / Italian /Japanese /
Lithuanian / Norwegian / Persian / Polish /
Portuguese / Romanian / Russian / Serbian /
Simplified Chinese / Slovakian / Slovenian /
Spanish / Thai / Traditional Chinese / Turkish
Note: The text overlay function is only supported in V1.05 or later.
Application
Network Storage
GV-NVR, GV-System, GV-Backup Center,
GV-Recording Server
Mobile Phone support
GV-AView for Android Smartphone, GV-Eye
HD for iPad, GV-Eye for iPhone and iPod
Touch, GV-GView for Windows PDA, GVMSView for Windows Smartphone, GVSSView for Symbian Smartphone, 3Genabled phone
Live Viewing
IE , Mobile Phone
CMS Server support
GV-Control Center, GV-Center V2,
GV-VSM
Note: GV-Backup Center, GV-Video Gateway and GV-Recording Server
are only supported for V1.03 or later.
All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
424
Appendix
A. Settings for Internet Explorer 8
If you use Internet Explorer 8, it is required to complete the following
setting.
1.
2.
Set the Security to Medium-high (default).
Enable Allow previously unused ActiveX controls to run without
prompt.
3.
Disable Only allow approved domains to use ActiveX without
prompt.
Appendix
B. Supported Lenses for Box Camera
Provider
Model No.
RV0409D.IR
Fujian Forecam Optics
RV0515D.IR
RV0820D.IR
EVD03618F-IR
EVD04218F-IR
EVETAR
EVD06018F-IR
EVD08018F-IR
EVD12018F-IR
EVD16018F-IR
Pentax
TS3VP213ED-M
426
C. Resolution and Frame Rate
Note that the frame rate and the performance may vary depending on the
number of connections and data bitrates (different scenes).
GV-IP Camera
Stream
Ratio Resolution
4:3
Main
GV-BX110D
GV-MFD110
GV-BL110D
5:4
GV-BX120D
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX120D-E
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD130
GV-MDR120
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
GV-FD120D
GV-CB120
GV-CBW120
427
Main
Sub
1280 x 960
15 fps
640 x 480
320 x 240
30 fps
1280 x 1024
15 fps
640 x 512
320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480
320 x 240
5:4
640 x 512
320 x 256
4:3
1280 x 960
640 x 480
320 x 240
16:9
1280 x 720
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024
640 x 512
320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480
320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512
320 x 256
Sub
Max. Frame
Rate
30 fps
30 fps
Appendix
GV-IP Camera
Stream
Ratio Resolution
Main
16:9
1280 x 720
640 x 360
448 x 252
16:9
640 x 360
448 x 252
4:3
1600 x 1200
1280 x 960
640 x 480
320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024
640 x 512
320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480
320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512
320 x 256
GV-BX140DW
Sub
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX220D-E
GV-MFD220
GV-MDR220
GV-BL220D
GV-VD220D
GV-VD221D
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
GV-FD220D
GV-CB220
GV-CBW220
Main
Sub
Max. Frame
Rate
30 fps
30 fps
428
GV-IP Camera
Stream
Ratio Resolution
2048 x 1536
4:3
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX320D-E
GV-MFD320
GV-MDR320
GV-BL320D
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
GV-FD320D
Sub
20 fps
1600 x 1200
1280 x 960
640 x 480
320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024
640 x 512
320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480
320 x 240
16:9
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512
320 x 256
Main
Max. Frame
Rate
30fps
Note: For GV-BX320D Series, GV-BX320D-E, GV-BL320D, GV-VD320D
/ 321D / 322D / 323D and GV-FD320D, the maximum frame rate for sub
stream is 15 fps when the main stream resolution is set as 2048 x 1536.
429
Appendix
GV-IP Camera
Stream
Ratio Resolution
4:3
Main
GV-BX520D-0
GV-BX520D-E
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR520
Sub
Max. Frame
Rate
2560 x 1920
10 fps
2048 x 1536
20 fps
1600 x 1200
1280 x 960
640 x 480
320 x 240
16:9
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
1280 x 1024
640 x 512
320 x 256
4:3
640 x 480
320 x 240
16 : 9
640 x 360
448 x 252
5:4
640 x 512
320 x 256
30 fps
Note: For GV-BX520D-0, GV-BX520D-E, GV-MFD520 and GV-MDR520,
the maximum frame rate for sub stream is 10 fps when the main stream
resolution is st as 2560 x 1920.
430
GV-IP Camera
Stream
Main
Ratio Resolution
n/a
704 x 480
NTSC 704 x 240 30 fps
352 x 240
PAL
GV-PTZ010D
Sub
n/a
Main
5:4
GV-PT110D
704 x 576
704 x 288 25 fps
352 x 288
1280 x 960
15 fps
640 x 480
320 x 240
30 fps
1280 x 1024
15 fps
640 x 512
320 x 256
4: 3
640 x 480
320 x 240
5: 4
640 x 512
320 x 256
Sub
431
704 x 576
704 x 288 25 fps
352 x 288
704 x 480
NTSC 704 x 240 30 fps
352 x 240
PAL
4:3
Max. Frame
Rate
30 fps
Appendix
D. Support Lists
•
Support List for GV-Backup Center, GV-Video Gateway and GVRecording Server
GV-IP Camera
Model
Supported Version
GV-BX110D
V1.08 or later
GV-BX120D
Box Camera
GV-BX220D Series
V1.03 or later
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX130D Series
V1.04 or later
GV-BX520D-0
V1.05 or later
GV-BX120D-E
IR Arctic Box Camera
GV-BX220D-E
V1.07 or later
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
Mini Fixed Dome
GV-MFD110
V1.08 or later
GV-MFD130
V1.04 or later
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
V1.05 or later
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR120
Mini Fixed Rugged
GV-MDR220
Dome
GV-MDR320
V1.07 or later
GV-MDR520
432
GV-IP Camera
Model
GV-BL110D
Supported Version
V1.08 or later
GV-BL120D
Bullet Camera
GV-BL220D
V1.03 or later
GV-BL320D
GV-BL130D
PT and PTZ Camera
GV-PTZ010D
GV-PT110D
V1.04 or later
V1.08 or later
GV-VD120D Series
Vandal Proof IP Dome
GV-VD220D Series
V1.03 or later
GV-VD320D Series
GV-FD120D
Fixed IP Dome
GV-FD220D
V1.03 or later
GV-FD320D
Cube Camera
Wireless Cube
Camera
433
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
V1.03 or later
V1.07 or later
Appendix
•
Support List for Transmit Audio
GV-IP Camera
Model
Supported Version
GV-BX110D
V1.08 or later
GV-BX120D
Box Camera
GV-BX220D Series
V1.05 or later
GV-BX320D Series
GV-BX130D Series
V1.04 or later
GV-BX520D-0
V1.05 or later
GV-BX120D-E
IR Arctic Box Camera
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
V1.07 or later
GV-BX520D-E
Mini Fixed Dome
GV-MFD110
V1.08 or later
GV-MFD130
V1.04 or later
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
V1.05 or later
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR120
Mini Fixed Rugged
Dome
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
V1.07 or later
GV-MDR520
434
GV-IP Camera
Model
GV-BL110D
Bullet Camera
Supported Version
V1.08 or later
GV-BL120D
GV-BL220D
V1.05 or later
GV-BL320D
GV-BL130D
V1.04 or later
PTZ Camera
GV-PTZ010D
V1.08 or later
PT Camera
GV-PT110D
V1.08 or later
GV-VD120D Series
Vandal Proof IP Dome
GV-VD220D Series
V1.05 or later
GV-VD320D Series
GV-FD120D
Fixed IP Dome
GV-FD220D
V1.05 or later
GV-FD320D
Cube Camera
Wireless Cube
Camera
435
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
V1.03 or later
V1.07 or later
Appendix
•
Support List for System Log
GV-IP Camera
Model
GV-BX110D
Supported Version
V1.08 or later
GV-BX120D
Box Camera
GV-BX220D Series
GV-BX320D Series
V1.11 or later
GV-BX130D Series
GV-BX520D-0
GV-BX120D-E
IR Arctic Box Camera
GV-BX220D-E
V1.11 or later
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
GV-MFD110
V1.08 or later
GV-MFD130
Mini Fixed Dome
GV-MFD120
GV-MFD220
V1.11 or later
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
GV-MDR120
Mini Fixed Rugged
Dome
GV-MDR220
GV-MDR320
GV-MDR520
GV-BL110D
Bullet Camera
V1.11 or later
V1.08 or later
GV-BL120D
GV-BL130D
GV-BL220D
V1.11 or later
GV-BL320D
436
GV-IP Camera
PT and PTZ Camera
Model
GV-PTZ010D
GV-PT110D
Supported Version
V1.08 or later
GV-VD120D Series
Vandal Proof IP Dome
GV-VD220D Series
V1.11 or later
GV-VD320D Series
GV-FD120D
Fixed IP Dome
GV-FD220D
V1.11 or later
GV-FD320D
Cube Camera
Wireless Cube
Camera
437
GV-CB120
GV-CB220
GV-CBW120
GV-CBW220
V1.11 or later
V1.11 or later
Appendix
E. RTSP Protocol Command
The GV-IPCAM H.264 can support RTSP protocol for both audio and video
streaming.
z If you use the QuickTime player, enter:
rtsp://<IP of the GV-IPCAM H.264:8554/<CH No.>.sdp
For example, rtsp://192.168.3.111:8554/CH001.sdp
z If you use the VLC, and if authentication is required, enter:
rtsp://username:[email protected]<IP of the GV-IPCAM H.264:8554/<CH
No.>.sdp
For example, rtsp://admin:[email protected]:8554/CH001.sdp
z If you use the VLC, and if authentication is not required, enter:
rtsp://@<IP of the GV-IPCAM H.264:8554/<CH No.>.sdp
For example, rtsp://@192.168.3.111:8554/CH001.sdp
Note:
1.
2.
The RTSP streaming is supported over HTTP, UTP and TCP port.
The RTSP server must be enabled on the Web interface. See
Figure 13-20.
3.
Only VLC and QuickTime players are supported for streaming
video via RTSP protocol.
4.
For GV-PTZ010D, the RTSP streaming provides source video
images of 352 x 240 / 352 x 288 only.
438
F. The CGI Command
Please note the supported version of the CGI command in different models:
GV-IP Camera
Supported Version
GV-BX110D
GV-MFD110
V1.04 or later
GV-BL110D
GV-BX120D
GV-BX220D-0 / 220D-1 / 220D-2 / 223D-3
V1.0 or later
GV-BX320D-0 / 320D-1
GV-BL120D / 220D / 320D
GV-VD120D / 121D / 122D / 123D
V1.02 or later
GV-VD220D / 221D / 222D / 223D
GV-VD320D / 321D / 322D / 323D
GV-PT110D
V1.07 or later
GV-PTZ010D
GV-FD120D / 220D / 320D
V1.03 or later
GV-CB120 / 220
V1.03 or later
GV-BX120D-E
GV-BX220D-E
GV-BX320D-E
GV-BX520D-E
V1.07 or later
GV-MDR120 / 220 / 320 / 520
GV-CBW120 / 220
GV-BX130D Series
GV-MFD130
V1.04 or later
GV-BL130D
GV-BX140DW
V1.10 or later
GV-BX520D-0
GV-MFD120 / 220 / 320 / 520
439
V1.05 or later
Appendix
You can use the CGI command to obtain a snapshot of the live view or
access the User Account Web interface. For a GV-IPCAM H.264 with the
following details:
IP address: 192.168.2.11
Username: admin
Password: admin
Desired stream: 1
z To obtain a snapshot of the live view, type the following into your web
browser:
http://192.168.2.11/PictureCatch.cgi?username=admin&password=admin&
channel=1
z To access the User Account Web interface, type the following inot your
web browser:
http://192.168.2.11/ConfigPage.cgi?username=admin&password=admin&p
age=UserSetting
440
G. Dual Stream Support List
The table lists the firmware versions of GV-IP Cameras that support dual
stream and the default resolutions after the camera is added to GV-System.
Supported
GV-IP Camera
Firmware
Version
GV-BX110D
GV-MFD110
V1.00 to
V1.06
GV-BL110D
V1.07 or later
GV-BX120D
V1.00 or later
GV-MFD120
V1.05 or later
Resolution
Main Stream
Sub Stream
(H.264)
(MPEG4)
1280 x 1024
320 x 240
1280 x 1024
320 x 256
1280 x 1024
320 x 256
GV-BX120D-E
GV-CBW120
V1.07 or later
GV-MDR120
GV-BL120D
GV-VD120D
GV-VD121D
V1.02 or later
GV-VD122D
GV-VD123D
GV-FD120D
GV-CB120
441
V1.03 or later
Appendix
GV-IP Camera
Supported
Firmware
Version
Resolution
Main Stream
Sub Stream
(H.264)
(MPEG4)
GV-BX130D Series
GV-MFD130
V1.04 or later
1280 x 1024
320 x 256
1280 x 720
640 x 360
1920 x 1080
448 x 252
GV-BL130D
GV-BX140DW
V1.10 or later
GV-BX220D Series
V1.00 or later
GV-MFD220
V1.05 or later
GV-BX220D-E
GV-CBW220
V1.07 or later
GV-MDR220
GV-BL220D
GV-VD220D
GV-VD221D
V1.02 or later
GV-VD222D
GV-VD223D
GV-FD220D
GV-CB220
V1.03 or later
442
GV-IP Camera
Supported
Firmware
Version
GV-BX320D Series
V1.00 or later
GV-MFD320
V1.05 or later
GV-BX320D-E
GV-MDR320
Resolution
Main Stream
Sub Stream
(H.264)
(MPEG4)
V1.07 or later
2048 x 1536
320 x 240
2560 x 1920
320 x 240
GV-BL320D
GV-VD320D
GV-VD321D
V1.02 or later
GV-VD322D
GV-VD323D
GV-FD320D
GV-BX520D-0
GV-MFD520
GV-BX520D-E
GV-MDR520
V1.03 or later
V1.05 or later
V1.07 or later
GV-PT110D
V1.07 or later
1280 x 1024
320 x 256
GV-PTZ010D-N
V1.07 or later
704 x 480
352 x 240
GV-PTZ010D-P
V1.07 or later
704 x 576
325 x 288
443
Appendix
H. Power Supply Support List
The supported power type is indicated with a tick (9) and the unsupported
power type with a cross (8).
GV-IP Camera
Box Camera
IR Arctic Box Camera
GV-MFD110
DC Power
AC Power
PoE
9
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
8
9
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
GV-MFD120
Mini Fixed Dome
GV-MFD130
GV-MFD220
GV-MFD320
GV-MFD520
Mini Fixed Rugged Dome
Bullet Camera
PTZ Camera
PT Camera
Vandal Proof IP Dome
Fixed IP Dome
Cube Camera
Wireless Cube Camera
444
I. Supported Firmware for Flash Memory
The 128 MB flash memory is supported in V1.09 or later in all models of
GV-IPCam H.264 Series except GV-BX110D, GV-MFD110, GV-BL110D,
GV-PTZ010D, GV-PT110D,
To look up if the camera contains a 128 MB type flash memory, access the
web interface or the GV IP Device Utility:
z Web Interface
Click Management and click Tools. The “128 MB” should be noted
after the firmware version.
z GV IP Device Utility
The “128 M” should appear under the NOTE column.
445
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement